Fill - 2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents (Honda)

2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual

Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety ..........................................................................................................................ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5

Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................53

Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................115

How to operat

e the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................179

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving...........................................................................................................................................................191

The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................215

e Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................275

Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Th

ings to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................283

This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information...............................................................................................................................311

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)......................................................................325

A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contac

t us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................329

How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary

A summary of information you need when

you pull up to the fuel pump.

The information and specifications

included in this publication were in

effect at the time of approval for

printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

reserves the right, however, to

discontinue or change specifications

or design at any time without notice

and without incurring any obligation

whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual covers all

models of the 3.5 RL. You may find

descriptions of equipment and

features that are not on your

particular model.

This Owner’s Manual should be

considered a permanent part of the

car,andshouldremainwiththecar

when it is sold.

Owner’s Identification

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

01/09/28 19:24:08 31SZ3660_001

Main Menu

As you read this manual, you will

find information that is preceded by

a symbol. This

information is intended to help you

avoid damage to your Acura, other

property, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty booklet

thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights

and responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to read

this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and

convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you

can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps

to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When

your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff is

specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. Your

Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer

any questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations on your selection of the 2002 Acura 3.5 RL. We are certain

you will be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury cars in the

world.

Introduction

WARNING:

01/09/28 19:24:15 31SZ3660_002

Main Menu

−

To help you make informed

decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and

other information on labels and in

this manual. This information alerts

you to potential hazards that could

hurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,

including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

These signal words mean:

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it

carefully.

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important

Safety Precautions.

Your safety, and the safety of others,

is very important. And operating this

car safely is an important

responsibility.

Of course, it is not practical or

possible to warn you about all the

hazards associated with operating or

maintaining your car. You must use

your own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

AFewWordsAboutSafety

Safety Messages

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY

HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY

HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

instructions.

01/09/28 19:24:29 31SZ3660_003

Main Menu

Your Car at a Glance

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE

BBUUTTTTOONN

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE

HHAANNDDLLEE

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

SSYYSSTTEEMM

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW

SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONN

MMEEMMOORRYY

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE

HHAANNDDLLEE

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL

((PP..5533))

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

((PP..9911))

((PP..9933))

((PP..9988))

((PP..8833))

((PP..117799))

((PP..118800))

((PP..112288))

((PP..111144))

((PP..110022))

01/09/28 19:24:59 31SZ3660_005

Main Menu

Your Car at a Glance

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

((PP.. 7700))

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

((PP.. 6688,, 7700))

((PP.. 6666))

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

((PP.. 7711))

FFOOGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

((PP.. 6677))

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

((PP.. 6633,, 6666))

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

((PP.. 7711))

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTTSS

VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY

AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM OOFFFF

SSWWIITTCCHH

((PP.. 220022))

((PP.. 115588))

01/09/28 19:25:03 31SZ3660_006

Main Menu

01/09/28 19:25:05 31SZ3660_007

Main Menu

This section gives you important

information about how to protect

yourself and your passengers. It

shows you how to use seat belts

properly. It explains your Supple-

mental Restraint System. And it tells

you how to properly restrain infants

andchildreninyourcar.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8

...........................................Airbags . 9

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10

..........................Head Restraints . 10

..................................Door Locks . 10

........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12

.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12

............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 14

5. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 15

....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 20

All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 20

Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 21

The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks

...........................to Children . 21

If You Must Drive with Several

...................................Children . 23

If a Child Requires Close

..................................Attention . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 23

General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 24

.......................Protecting Infants . 28

.........Protecting Small Children . 32

.......Protecting Larger Children . 35

Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 39

Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 40

..Seat Belt System Components . 40

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40

Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 41

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 42

Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 43

........................SRS Components . 43

How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 43

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 45

How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 46

How The Side Airbag Indicator

............................Light Works . 47

.............................Airbag Service . 48

...Additional Safety Precautions . 48

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49

...................................Safety Labels . 50

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:25:11 31SZ3660_008

Main Menu

You’ll find many safety

recommendations throughout this

section, and throughout this manual.

Therecommendationsonthispage

are the ones we consider to be the

most important.

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed the greater the

risk, but serious accidents can also

occur at lower speeds. Never drive

faster than is safe for current

conditions, regardless of the

maximum speed posted.A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of collisions. Airbags

supplement seat belts, but airbags

are designed to inflate only in a

moderate to severe frontal collision.

So even though your car is equipped

with airbags, make sure you and

your passengers always wear your

seat belts, and wear them properly.

(See page .)

Children are safest when they are

properly restrained in the back seat,

notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo

smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly

restrained in a child safety seat. (See

page .)

Having a tire blowout or a

mechanical failure can be extremely

hazardous. To reduce the possibility

of such problems, check your tire

pressures and condition frequently,

and perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance. (See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even

one drink can reduce your ability to

respond to changing conditions, and

your reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drink

and drive, and don’t let your friends

drink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, they

can cause serious or fatal injuries to

occupants who sit too close to them,

or are not properly restrained.

Infants, young children, and short

adults are at the greatest risk. Be

sure to follow all instructions and

warnings in this manual. (See page

.)9

216

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Car in Safe Condition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

01/09/28 19:25:25 31SZ3660_009

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your car is equipped with many

features that work together to

protect you and your passengers

during a crash.

Some safety features do not require

anyactiononyourpart.These

include a strong steel framework

that forms a safety cage around the

passenger compartment; front and

rear crush zones that are designed to

crumple and absorb energy during a

crash; a collapsible steering column;

and seat belt tensioners that

automatically tighten the front seat

belts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

((55))

((77))

((66))

((22))

((11))

((99))

((88))

((1100)) ((33))((88))

((22))

((77))

((44))

((66))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee

((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess

((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss

((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss

((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn

((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss

((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss

((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss

((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss

((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss

01/09/28 19:25:34 31SZ3660_010

Main Menu

Table of Contents

In addition, most states and all

Canadian provinces require you to

wear seat belts.

Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof

your passengers, your car is

equipped with seat belts in all seating

positions.

Seat belts are the single most

effective safety device for adults and

larger children. (Infants and smaller

children must be properly restrained

in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly

increases the chance of serious

injury or death in a crash, even

though your car has airbags.

Your seat belt system also

includes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you and

your passengers to fasten your seat

belts.

These safety features are designed

to reduce the severity of injuries in a

crash. However, you and your

passengers can’t take full advantage

of these safety features unless you

remain sitting in a proper position

and

In fact, some safety

features can contribute to injuries if

they are not used properly.

Help protect you in almost every

type of crash, including frontal,

side, and rear impacts and

rollovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicle

so you can take advantage of the

vehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat belts

properly.

Not wearing a seat belt properly

increases the chance of serious

injury or death in a crash, even

if you have airbags.

Be sure you and your

passengers always wear seat

belts and wear them properly.

01/09/28 19:25:46 31SZ3660_011

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your car also has side airbags to help

protect the upper torso of the driver

or a front seat passenger during a

moderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you need

to know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplement

the seat belts.

Your car has a Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) with front

airbags to help protect the heads and

chests of the driver and a front seat

passenger during a moderate to

severe frontal collision.

Help keep you from being thrown

against the inside of the car and

against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out

of the car.

Help keep you in a good position

should the airbags ever deploy. A

good position reduces the risk of

injury from an inflating airbag, and

allows you to get the best

advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot

completely protect you in every

crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts

can reduce your risk of serious

injury.

Always wear

your seat belt, and make sure you

wear it properly.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags

01/09/28 19:25:59 31SZ3660_012

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Keeping your doors locked reduces

thechanceofbeingthrownoutof

the car during a crash. It also helps

prevent occupants from accidentally

opening a door and falling out, and

outsiders from unexpectedly opening

your doors.

Head restraints can help protect you

from whiplash and other injuries. For

maximum protection, the back of

your head should rest against the

center of the head restraint.

Move the front

seats as far back as possible, and

keep adjustable seat-backs in an

upright position whenever the car is

moving.

Your car’s seats are designed to keep

you in a comfortable, upright

position so you can take full

advantage of the protection offered

by seat belts and the energy

absorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-

backs can also affect your safety. For

example, sitting too close to the

steering wheel or dashboard

increases the risk of you or your

passenger being injured by striking

theinsideofthecar,orbyan

inflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reduces

the seat belt’s effectiveness and

increases the chance that the seat’s

occupant will slide under the seat

belt in a crash and be seriously

injured.

To do their job, airbags must

inflate with tremendous force and

speed. So while airbags help save

lives, they can cause minor injuries,

or more serious or even fatal

injuries if occupants are not

properly restrained or sitting

properly.

Always wear

your seat belt properly, and sit

upright and as far back as possible

from the steering wheel or

dashboard.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

Door Locks

Head Restraints

Seats & Seat-Backs

What you should do:Airbags offer no protection in rear

impacts, rollovers, or minor

frontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

01/09/28 19:26:12 31SZ3660_013

Main Menu

Table of Contents

All adults, and children who have

outgrown child safety seats, are

wearing their seat belts and

wearingthemproperly(seepage

Any infant or small child is

properly restrained in a child seat

inthebackseat(seepage ).

To make sure you and your

passengers get the maximum

protection from your car’s safety

features, check the following each

time before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives more

detailed information about how you

can maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safety

system can prevent all injuries or

deaths that can occur in severe

crashes, even when seat belts are

properly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly

adjusted (see page ).

All doors are closed and locked

(see page ).

Frontseatoccupantsaresitting

upright and as far back as possible

from the steering wheel and

dashboard (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored or

secured (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page

20 186

Driver and Passenger Safety

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist

Your Car’s Safety Features

01/09/28 19:26:22 31SZ3660_014

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The following pages provide

instructions on how to properly

protect the driver and other adult

occupants.

These instructions also apply to

children who have outgrown child

seats and are large enough to wear

lap/shoulder belts. (See page for

important additional guidelines on

how to properly protect larger

children.)

For security, locked doors can

prevent an outsider from

unexpectedly opening a door when

you come to a stop.

See page for how to lock the

doors.

After everyone has entered the car,

be sure the doors are closed and

locked.

For safety, locking the doors reduces

the chance that a passenger,

especially a child, will open a door

while the car is moving and

accidentally fall out. It also reduces

the chance of someone being thrown

out of the car during a crash.

Any driver who sits too close to the

steering wheel is at risk of being

seriously injured or killed by striking

the steering wheel or from being

struck by an inflating front airbag

during a crash.

Your car has a door monitor light on

the instrument panel to indicate

when a specific door is not tightly

closed.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors

Adjust the Front Seats

01/09/28 19:26:35 31SZ3660_015

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a

comfortable, upright position,

leaving ample space between your

chest and the airbag cover in the

center of the steering wheel. If you

sit too close to the steering wheel,

you could be injured if the front

airbag inflates.

To reduce the chance of injury, wear

your seat belt properly, sit upright

with your back against the seat, and

movetheseatawayfromthe

steering wheel to the farthest

distance that allows you to maintain

full control of the car.

Most shorter drivers can get far

enough away from the steering

wheel and still reach the pedals.

However, if you are concerned about

sitting too close, we recommend that

you investigate whether some type

of adaptive equipment may help.

See page for how to adjust the

front seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

rock it back and forth to make sure

the seat is locked in position.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that drivers

adjust the seat so the center of the

chest is at least 10 inches away from

the center of the steering wheel.

Also make sure your front seat

passenger moves the seat as far to

the rear as possible.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Sitting too close to a front

airbag can result in serious

injury or death if the front

airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the

front airbags as possible.

01/09/28 19:26:47 31SZ3660_016

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Before driving, make sure everyone

with an adjustable head restraint has

properly positioned the head

restraint. The restraint should be

positioned so the back of the

occupant’s head rests against the

center of the restraint. A taller

person should adjust the restraint as

high as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-

backs.

A front passenger should also adjust

the seat-back to an upright position,

but as far from the dashboard as

possible. A passenger who sits too

close to the dashboard could be

injured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer

rests against the occupant’s chest

reduces the protective capability of

the belt. It also increases the chance

of sliding under the belt in a crash

and being seriously injured. The

farther a seat-back is reclined, the

greater the risk of injury.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Reclining the seat-back too far

can result in serious injury or

death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position and sit well

back in the seat.

01/09/28 19:26:57 31SZ3660_017

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt as

low as possible across your hips,

then pull up on the shoulder part of

the belt so the lap part fits snugly.

This lets your strong pelvic bones

take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

Properly adjusted head restraints

will help protect occupants from

whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust the

head restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,

then tug on the belt to make sure the

belt is securely latched. Also check

that the belt is not twisted, because a

twisted belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts

Improperly positioning head

restraints reduces their

effectiveness and you can be

seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are

in place and positioned properly

before driving.

01/09/28 19:27:05 31SZ3660_018

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack from the

shoulder part, then check that the

belt rests across the center of your

chest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash over

the strongest bones in your upper

body.

If the seat belt touches or crosses

your neck, or if it crosses your arm

instead of your shoulder, you need to

adjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seat

belt anchor, press the release button

and slide the anchor up or down as

needed (it has four positions).

This could cause

very serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to work

as it should, it may not protect the

occupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that is

not working properly can be

seriously injured or killed. Have your

Acura dealer check the belt as soon

as possible.

See page for additional

information about your seat belt

system and how to take care of your

belts.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Never place the shoulder portion of a

lap/shoulder belt under your arm or

behind your back.

No one should

sit in a seat with an inoperative seat

belt.

Improperly positioning the seat

belts can cause serious injury

or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before

driving.

01/09/28 19:27:15 31SZ3660_019

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,

so that the wheel points toward your

chest, not toward your face.

See page for how to adjust the

steering wheel.

Pointing the steering wheel toward

your chest provides optimal

protection from the airbag.

After all occupants have adjusted

their seats and put on seat belts, it is

very important that they continue to

sit upright, well back in their seats,

with their feet on the floor, until the

car is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the

chance of injury during a crash. For

example, if an occupant slouches,

lies down, turns sideways, sits

forward, leans forward or sideways,

or puts one or both feet up, the

chance of injury during a crash is

greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of

position in the front seat can be

seriously or fatally injured by

striking interior parts of the car, or

by being struck by an inflating front

airbag. Being struck by an inflating

side airbag can result in possibly

serious injuries.

CONTINUED

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position

6. 7.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting improperly or out of

position can result in serious

injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in

the seat, with your feet on the

floor.

01/09/28 19:27:27 31SZ3660_020

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Because protecting the mother is the

best way to protect her unborn child,

a pregnant woman should always

wear a seat belt whenever she drives

or rides in a car.

Pregnant women should also sit

upright and as far back as possible

from the steering wheel or

dashboard. This will reduce the risk

of injuries to both the mother and

her unborn child that can be caused

by a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, ask

your doctor if it’s okay for you to

drive.

Remember to keep the lap portion of

the belt as low as possible across

your hips.

Remember, to get the best

protection from your car’s airbags

and other safety features, you must

sit properly and wear your seat belt

properly.

Advice for Pregnant Women

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:27:36 31SZ3660_021

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a

crash.

Carrying hard or sharp

objects on your lap, or driving with

a pipe or other sharp object in

your mouth, can result in injuries

if your front airbag inflates.

If your

hands or arms are close to the

airbag cover in the center of the

steering wheel or on top of the

dashboard, they could be injured if

the front airbags inflate.

If a side airbag

inflates,acupholderorotherhard

object attached on or near the

door could be propelled inside the

car and hurt someone.

Any object

attached to or placed on the covers

marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the

center of the steering wheel and

on top of the dashboard could

interfere with the proper operation

of the airbags. Or, if the airbags

inflate, the objects could be

propelled inside the car and hurt

someone.

Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

shoulder part of a seat belt can

severely compromise the

protective capability of the seat

belt and increase the chance of

serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety Precautions

Two people should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objects

between yourself and a front

airbag.

Keep your hands and arms away

from the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on or

near a front door.

Do not attach or place objects on

the front airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seat

belts.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:27:45 31SZ3660_022

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Children depend on adults to protect

them. However, despite their best

intentions, many parents and other

adults may not know how to

protect young passengers. (See page

To reduce the number of child

deaths and injuries, every state and

Canadian province requires that

infants and children be restrained

whenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injured

or killed in vehicle crashes because

they are either unrestrained or not

properly restrained. In fact, vehicle

accidents are the number one cause

of death of children ages 12 and

under.

(See page

So if you have children, or if you ever

need to drive with a grandchild or

otherchildreninyourcar,besureto

read this section.

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara

seat belt should be properly

restrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always be

restrained with a seat belt.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Children who are unrestrained

or improperly restrained can be

seriously injured or killed in a

crash.

Any child too small for a seat

belt should be properly

restrained in a child seat. A

larger child should be properly

restrained with a seat belt.

01/09/28 19:27:55 31SZ3660_023

Main Menu

Table of Contents

According to accident statistics,

children of all ages and sizes are

safer when they are restrained in the

back seat, not the front seat. The

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that all children

ages 12 and under be properly

restrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are less

likely to be injured by striking hard

interior parts during a collision or

hard braking. Also, children cannot

be injured by an inflating airbag

when they ride in the back.

Front airbags have been designed to

help protect adults in a moderate to

severe frontal collision. To do this,

the passenger’s front airbag is quite

large, and it inflates with tremendous

speed.

the airbag inflates, it can hit the back

of the child seat with enough force

to kill or very seriously injure an

infant.

If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is

thrown forward during a collision, an

inflating front airbag can strike the

child with enough force to kill or

very seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,

larger children should sit in the back

seat, properly restrained with a seat

belt. (See page for important

information about protecting larger

children.)

CONTINUED

Small Children

Larger Children

Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped

with a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

Placing a forward-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped

with a passenger’s front airbag can

be hazardous.

Children who have outgrown child

seats are also at risk of being injured

or killed by an inflating passenger’s

front airbag.

Children Should Sit in the Back

Seat

The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:28:08 31SZ3660_024

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To remind you of the passenger’s

front airbag hazards, and that

children must be properly restrained

in the back seat, your car has

warninglabelsonthedashboardand

on the driver’s and front passenger’s

visors. Please read and follow the

instructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbag

hazards, your car has warning labels

on the driver’s and front passenger’s

visors. Please read and follow the

instructions on these labels.

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:28:23 31SZ3660_025

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Using this feature will

prevent children from opening the

doors and accidentally falling out

(see page ).

Using

this feature will prevent children

from playing with the windows,

which could expose them to

hazards or distract the driver (see

page ).

Many parents say they prefer to put

an infant or small child in the front

passenger seat so they can watch the

child, or because the child requires

attention.

Placing a child in the front seat

exposes the child to hazards from

the passenger’s front airbag, and

paying close attention to a child

distracts the driver from the

important tasks of driving, placing

both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attention

or frequent visual contact, we

strongly recommend that another

adult ride with the child in the back

seat. The back seat is far safer for a

child than the front.

Place the largest child in the front

seat, provided the child is large

enough to wear a seat belt

properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to the

rear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and well

backintheseat(seepage ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page

Your car has three seating positions

in the back seat where children can

be properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more than

three children in your car:

100

CONTINUED

Additional Safety PrecautionsIf a Child Requires Close

Attention

If You Must Drive with Several

Children

Use childproof door locks to

prevent children from opening the

doors.

Use the main power window

switch to prevent children from

opening the rear windows.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:28:38 31SZ3660_026

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The following pages give general

guidelines for selecting and installing

child seats for infants and small

children.

To provide proper protection, a child

seat should meet three

requirements:

The child seat should

meet Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)

or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look

for the manufacturer’s statement

of compliance on the box and seat.

Leaving children without

adult supervision is illegal in most

states and Canadian provinces,

and can be very hazardous. For

example, infants and small

childrenleftinavehicleonahot

day can die from heatstroke. And

children left alone with the key in

the ignition can accidentally set

the vehicle in motion, possibly

injuring themselves or others.

Children

who play in cars can accidentally

get trapped inside the trunk.

Teach your children not to play in

or around cars. Know how to

operate the emergency trunk

opener (US models only) and

decide if your children should be

shown how to use this feature (see

page ).

Even very young

children learn how to unlock

vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,

and open the trunk, which can

lead to accidental injury or death.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

General Guidelines for Using

Child Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safety

standards.

Do not leave children alone in your

vehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk when

your car is not in use.

Keep car keys and remote

transmitters out of the reach of

children.

01/09/28 19:28:46 31SZ3660_027

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Before purchasing a child seat, we

recommend that parents test the

child seat in the specific vehicle

seating position (or positions) where

they intend to use the seat. If a

previously purchased child seat does

not fit, you may need to buy a

different one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design of

child seats, vehicle seats, and seat

belts, all child seats will not fit all

vehicle seating positions.

However, Acura is confident that one

or more child seat models can fit and

be properly installed in all

recommended seating positions in

your car.A child who is too

large for a rear-facing child seat, and

who can sit up without support,

should be restrained in a forward-

facing child seat. See page for

additional information on protecting

small children.

Childrenuptoaboutone

year old should be restrained in a

rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only

a rear-facing seat provides the

proper support to protect an infant’s

head, neck, and back. See page

for additional information on

protecting infants.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

The child seat should fit the

vehicle seating position (or

positions) where it will be used.

Small Children:The child seat should be of the

proper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:

01/09/28 19:28:57 31SZ3660_028

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If a small child must ride in the

front, follow the instructions

provided in this section.

This page briefly summarizes Acura’s

recommendations on where to place

rear-facing and forward-facing child

seats in your car.

The passenger’s front airbag

inflates with enough force to kill

or seriously injure an infant in a

rear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facing

child seat is also at risk. If the

vehicle seat is too far forward,

or the child’s head is thrown

forward during a collision, an

inflating front airbag can kill or

seriously injure the child.

Never in the front seat, due

to the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,

due to the front airbag hazard. If a

small child must ride in front,

move the vehicle seat to the rear-

most position and secure a front-

facing child seat with the seat belt

(see page ).

Recommended positions.

Secure a rear-facing child seat

with the seat belt (see page ).

Recommended

positions. Secure a front-facing

child seat with the seat belt (see

page ).

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat

Infants:

Small children:

Back Seats

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose Serious

Risks to Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:29:10 31SZ3660_029

Main Menu

Table of Contents

After selecting a proper child seat,

and a good position to install the seat,

there are three main steps in

installing the seat:

Make sure the child is properly

strappedinthechildseat

according to the child seat maker’s

instructions. A child who is not

properly secured in a child seat

canbethrownoutoftheseatina

crash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normal

driving maneuvers as well as during

a collision, we recommend that

parents secure a child seat as firmly

as possible.

However, a child seat does not need

to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles

or seating positions, it may be

difficult to install a child seat so that

it does not move at all. Some side-to-

side or back-and-forth movement can

be expected and should not reduce

the child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, try

installing it in a different seating

position, or use a different style of

child seat that can be firmly secured

in the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,

either remove it and store it in a safe

place, or make sure it is properly

secured. An unsecured child seat can

be thrown around the car during a

crash or sudden stop and injure

someone.

All child seats

must be secured to the car with

the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

A child whose seat is not properly

secured to the car can be

endangered in a crash. See pages

and for instructions on how

to secure child seats in this car.

After installing a child

seat, push and pull the seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure.

29 33

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Secure the child seat to the car

with a seat belt.

Make sure the child seat is firmly

secured.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:29:23 31SZ3660_030

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Only a rear-facing child seat provides

proper support for a baby’s head,

neck, and back. Infants up to about

one year of age must be restrained in

a rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seat

canbeplacedinanyseatingposition

in the back seat, but not in the front

seat.

We recommend that an infant be

restrained in a rear-facing child seat

until the infant reaches the seat

maker’s weight or height limit and is

able to sit up without support.

Two types of seats may be used: a

seat designed exclusively for infants,

or a convertible seat used in the rear-

facing, reclining mode.

If the passenger’s

front airbag inflates, it can hit the

back of the child seat with enough

forcetokillorseriouslyinjurean

infant. If an infant must be closely

watched, we recommend that

another adult sit in the back seat

with the baby.

If placed

facing forward, an infant could be

very seriously injured during a

frontal collision.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in

a forward-facing position.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Placing a rear-facing child seat

in the front seat can result in

serious injury or death if the

passenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing child

seat in the back seat, not the

front.

01/09/28 19:29:33 31SZ3660_031

Main Menu

Table of Contents

With the child seat in the desired

back seating position, route the

belt through the child seat

according to the seat maker’s

instructions, then insert the latch

plate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,

slowly pull the shoulder part of the

belt all the way out until it stops,

then let the belt feed back into the

retractor (you might hear a

clicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug on

it. If the belt is locked, you will not

be able to pull it out. If you can pull

the belt out, it is not locked and

you will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the back

seats have a locking mechanism that

must be activated to secure a child

seat.

The following pages provide

instructions and tips on how to

secure a rear-facing child seat with

this type of seat belt.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:29:43 31SZ3660_032

Main Menu

Table of Contents

After confirming that the belt is

locked, grab the shoulder part of

the belt near the buckle and pull

up to remove any slack from the

lap part of the belt. Remember, if

the lap part of the belt is not tight,

the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help to

putweightonthechildseat,or

push on the back of the seat, while

pulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure enough to

stay upright during normal driving

maneuvers. If the child seat is not

secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to

retract fully, then repeat these

steps.

To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,

unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat

belt, and let the belt fully retract.

4. 5.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:29:50 31SZ3660_033

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you are not wearing a seat belt

in a crash, you could be thrown

forward into the dashboard and

crush the infant.

Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the

infantcanbetornfromyourarms

during a crash. For example, if

your car crashes into a parked

vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a

20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a

600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will

notbeabletoholdon.

In either case, we recommend that

you place the child seat directly

behind the front passenger seat,

move the front seat as far forward as

needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or

you may wish to get a smaller child

seat that allows you to safely carry a

front passenger.

When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the

driver or a front-seat passenger from

moving the seat as far back as

recommended (see page ). Or it

may prevent them from locking the

seat-back in the desired upright

position (see page ).

To achieve the desired reclining

angle, it may help to put a rolled up

towel under the toe of the child seat,

as shown.

Forproperprotection,aninfantmust

ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined

position. To determine the proper

reclining angle, check with the baby’s

doctor or follow the seat maker’s

recommendations.

During a crash, the

belt could press deep into the

infant and cause very serious

injuries.

Additional Precautions for Infants

Never hold an infant on your lap.

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Tips

Never put a seat belt over yourself

and an infant.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:30:00 31SZ3660_034

Main Menu

Table of Contents

A child who can sit up without

support, and who fits within the child

seat maker’s weight and height

limits, should be restrained in a

forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-

point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a small

child stay in the child seat as long as

possible, until the child reaches the

weight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install a

forward-facing child seat is in one of

the seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is

thrown forward during a collision, an

inflating front airbag can strike the

child with enough force to cause

very serious or fatal injuries. If a

small child must be closely watched,

we recommend that another adult sit

in the back seat with the child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-

facing child seat in the front, move

the vehicle seat as far to the rear as

possible, be sure the child seat is

firmly secured to the car, and the

child is properly strapped in the seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped

with a passenger’s front airbag can

be hazardous.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly placing a forward-

facing child seat in the front

seat can result in serious injury

or death if the front airbags

inflate.

Ifyoumustplaceaforward-

facing child seat in front, move

the vehicle seat as far back as

possible and properly restrain

the child.

01/09/28 19:30:10 31SZ3660_035

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To activate the lockable retractor,

slowly pull the shoulder part of the

belt all the way out until it stops,

then let the belt feed back into the

retractor (you might hear a

clicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug on

it. If the belt is locked, you will not

be able to pull it out. If you can pull

the belt out, it is not locked and

you will need to repeat these steps.

The lap/shoulder belts in the back

and front passenger seating positions

have a locking mechanism that must

be activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provide

instructions on how to secure a

forward-facing child seat with this

type of seat belt.

With the child seat in the desired

seating position, route the belt

through the child seat according

to the seat maker’s instructions,

then insert the latch plate into the

buckle.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:30:20 31SZ3660_036

Main Menu

Table of Contents

After confirming that the belt is

locked, grab the shoulder part of

the belt near the buckle and pull

up to remove any slack from the

lap part of the belt. Remember, if

the lap part of the belt is not tight,

the child seat will not be secure. It

mayhelptoputweightonthe

child seat, or push on the back of

the seat, while pulling up on the

belt.

Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure enough to

stay upright during normal driving

maneuvers. If the child seat is not

secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to

retract fully, then repeat these

steps.

To deactivate the locking

mechanism in order to remove a

child restraint system, unlatch the

buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let

the belt fully retract.

4. 5.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:30:27 31SZ3660_037

Main Menu

Table of Contents

When a child reaches the

recommended weight or height limit

for a forward-facing child seat, the

child should sit in the back seat and

wear a lap/shoulder belt.

If you are not wearing a seat

belt in a crash, you could be

thrown forward into the

dashboard and crush the child.

During a crash, the

belt could press deep into the child

and cause very serious injuries.

Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the

child can be torn from your arms

during a crash. For example, if

your car crashes into a parked

vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a

30-lb (14 kg) child will become a

900-lb (410 kg) force, and you will

not be able to hold on.

If a child is too short for the shoulder

part of the belt to properly fit, we

recommend that the child use a

booster seat until the child is tall

enough to use the seat belt without a

booster.

The following pages give

instructions on how to check proper

seat belt fit, what kind of booster

seat to use if one is needed, and

important precautions for a child

who must sit in the front seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Additional Precautions for Small

Children

Never hold a small child on your

lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourself

and a child.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Allowing a larger child to sit

improperly in the front seat can

result in injury or death if the

passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,

make sure the child moves the

seat as far back as possible

and wears the seat belt properly.

01/09/28 19:30:38 31SZ3660_038

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

shoulder part of a seat belt, severely

compromise the protective capability

of the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they could

be very seriously injured in a crash.

However, if the belt touches or

crosses the child’s neck, the child

needs to use a booster seat.

This could result in

serious neck injuries during a crash.

This could cause

very serious injuries during a crash.

It also increases the chance that the

child will slide under the belt in a

crash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child

put on the seat belt. Follow the

instructions on page . Then check

how the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt rests

over the child’s collarbone and

against the center of the chest, as

shown, the child is large enough to

wear the seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seat

belt.

Two children should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulder

part of a seat belt behind the back or

under the arm.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:30:48 31SZ3660_039

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that all children

ages 12 and under be properly

restrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place for

a child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger’s front

airbag poses serious risks to children.

If the seat is too far forward, or the

child’s head is thrown forward

during a collision, or the child is

unrestrained or out of position, an

inflating front airbag can kill or

seriously injure the child.

Thesideairbagalsoposesrisks.If

any part of a larger child’s body is in

the path of a deploying airbag, the

child could receive possibly serious

injuries.

A child may continue using a booster

seat until the tops of the ears are

even with the top of the seat-back. A

child of this height should be tall

enough to use the lap/shoulder belt

without a booster.

Whichever style you select, follow

the booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child needs a booster seat, we

recommend choosing a style that

allows the child to use the lap/

shoulder belt directly, without a

shield, as shown.

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:31:00 31SZ3660_040

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Of course, children vary widely. And

while age may be one indicator of

when a child can safely ride in the

front, there are other important

factors you should consider.

If you decide that a child can safely

ride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual

and make sure you understand all

seat belt instructions and all safety

information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-

most position.

Have the child sit up straight, back

against the seat, and feet on or

near the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt is

properly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even mature

children sometimes need to be

reminded to fasten the seat belts

or sit properly.

Physically, a child must be large

enough for the lap/shoulder belt to

properly fit over the hips, chest, and

shoulder (see pages and ). If

the seat belt does not fit properly,

the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child must

be able to follow the rules, including

sitting properly and wearing the seat

belt properly throughout a ride.

15 35

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Physical Size

Maturity

01/09/28 19:31:10 31SZ3660_041

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Attach the tether strap hook to the

tether anchorage point as shown in

the illustration, then tighten the

strap according to the child seat

maker’s instructions. Make sure the

strap is not twisted.

Your car has three tether anchorage

points under the rear window for

securing a tether-style child seat to

the car.

Since a tether can provide additional

security, we recommend using a

tether whenever one is required or

available.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Using Child Seats with Tethers

01/09/28 19:31:18 31SZ3660_042

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This seat belt has a single belt that

goes over your shoulder, across your

chest and across your hips.

Your seat belt system includes lap/

shoulder belts in all five seating

positions. The front seat belts are

also equipped with automatic seat

belt tensioners.

To unlock the belt, push the red

PRESSbuttononthebuckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch

plate into the buckle, then tug on the

belt to make sure the buckle is

latched.

Guide the belt across your body to

the door pillar. After exiting the car,

be sure the belt is out of the way and

will not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergency

locking retractor. In normal driving,

the retractor lets you move freely in

your seat while it keeps some

tension on the belt. During a collision

or sudden stop, the retractor

automatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positions

except the driver’s have an additional

locking mechanism that must be

activated to secure a child seat. (See

pages and for instructions on

how to secure child seats with this

type of seat belt.)

The seat belt system also

includes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you and

your passengers to fasten your belts.

If the driver’s seat belt is not

fastened before the ignition is turned

ON (II), the light will come on and a

beeper will also sound. The beeper

will stop after a few seconds, but the

light will stay on until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened.

29 33

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

01/09/28 19:31:29 31SZ3660_043

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If the shoulder part of the belt is

pulled all the way out, the locking

mechanism will activate. The belt

will retract, but it will not allow the

passenger to move freely.

To deactivate the locking

mechanism, unlatch the buckle and

let the seat belt fully retract. To

refasten the belt, pull it out only as

far as needed.

See page for instructions on how

to wear the lap/shoulder belt

properly. For added protection, the front seat

belts are equipped with automatic

seat belt tensioners. When activated,

the tensioners immediately tighten

the belts to help hold the driver and

a front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed to

activate primarily in frontal collisions.

The tensioners are independent of

the airbag system, so they can be

activated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags to

deploy. In this case, the airbags

would not be needed but the

additional seat belt tension can be

helpful.

The tensioners will be activated in a

collision severe enough to cause the

front airbags to inflate.

The SRS indicator light will

come on if there is a

problem with your automatic seat

belt tensioners (see page ).

When the tensioners are activated,

the seat belts will remain tight until

they are unbuckled in the normal

way.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

01/09/28 19:31:39 31SZ3660_044

Main Menu

Table of Contents

For safety, you should check the

condition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look for

frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check

that the latches work smoothly and

that the lap/shoulder belts retract

easily. Any belt not in good condition

or not working properly will not

provide good protection and should

be replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a lifetime warranty

on seat belts. Acura will repair or

replace any seat belt component

that fails to function properly

during normal use. Please see

your

booklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by the dealer. A

belt that has been worn during a

crash may not provide the same level

of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the

anchors for damage and replace

them if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners that

deployed during a crash must be

replaced.

For information on how to clean your

seat belts, see page .

277

Acura Warranty Information

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

Not checking or maintaining

seat belts can result in serious

injury or death if the seat belts

do not work properly when

needed.

Check your seat belts regularly

and have any problem

corrected as soon as possible.

01/09/28 19:31:49 31SZ3660_045

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) includes:

An indicator light on the

instrument panel that alerts you to

a possible problem with the

system (see page ).

Two front airbags. The driver’s

airbag is stored in the center of

the steering wheel; the front

passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe

dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS

AIRBAG.’’

Sensors that can detect a

moderate to severe frontal

collision.

Automatic seat belt tensioners

(see page ).

Emergency backup power in case

your car’s electrical system is

disconnected in a crash.

If you ever have a moderate to

severe frontal collision, the sensors

will detect the vehicle’s rapid

deceleration. If the rate of

deceleration is high enough, the

control unit will instantly inflate the

front airbags.

A sophisticated electronic system

that continually monitors and

records information about the

sensors, the control unit, the

airbag activators, and driver and

passenger seat belt use when the

ignition is ON (II).

CONTINUED

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

01/09/28 19:32:01 31SZ3660_046

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The total time for inflation and

deflation is approximately one-tenth

of a second, so fast that most

occupants are not aware that the

airbags deployed until they see them

lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see what

looks like smoke. This is actually

powder from the airbag’s surface.

Although the powder is not harmful,

people with respiratory problems

may experience some temporary

discomfort. If this occurs, get out of

the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

For additional information on how

your airbags work, see the booklet

titled

that came with your

owner’s manual.

Since both airbags use the same

sensors, both airbags normally

inflate at the same time. However, it

is possible for only one airbag to

inflate.

This can occur when the severity of

a collision is at the margin, or

threshold, that determines whether

or not the airbags will deploy. In

such cases, the seat belt will provide

sufficient protection, and the

supplemental protection offered by

the airbag would be minimal.

After inflating, the front airbags

immediately deflate, so they won’t

interfere with the driver’s visibility,

or the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

For additional information on how

your airbags work, ask your dealer

for a copy of the booklet titled

During a frontal crash, your seat

belts help restrain your lower body

and torso. Your airbag provides a

cushion to help restrain and protect

your head and chest.

SRS: What You Need to Know

About Airbags

SRS:

What You Need to Know About Airbags

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

01/09/28 19:32:12 31SZ3660_047

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To get the best protection from the

side airbags, front seat occupants

should wear their seat belts and sit

upright and well back in their seats.

Your car is equipped with side

airbags for the driver and a front

seat passenger. The airbags are

stored in the outer edges of the front

seat-backs, and both are marked

‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, the sensors will

detect rapid deceleration and signal

the control unit to instantly inflate

either the driver’s or the passenger’s

side airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during a

side impact. If the impact is on the

passenger’s side, the passenger’s

side airbag will deploy even if there

is no passenger.

Driver and Passenger Safety

How Your Side Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

01/09/28 19:32:19 31SZ3660_048

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If the light comes on at any other

time, or does not come on at all, you

should have the system checked by

your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does not

come on after you turn the ignition

ON (II).

If the light stays on after the

engine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes on

andoffwhileyoudrive.

ThepurposeoftheSRS

indicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with your

front airbags. This light will also

alert you to a potential problem with

your automatic seat belt tensioners

(page );oryoursideairbagsor

passenger’s side airbag automatic

cutoff system (page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),

this indicator will light briefly then

go out. This tells you that the system

is working properly. If you see any of these indications,

your front or side airbags may not

deploy, your passenger’s side airbag

automatic cutoff system may not

work properly, or your seat belt

tensioners may not work when you

need them. See your Acura dealer as

soon as possible.

How the SRS Indicator Light

Works

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Ignoring the SRS indicator light

can result in serious injury or

death if the airbags, cutoff

system, or tensioners do not

work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a

dealer as soon as possible if

theSRSlightalertsyoutoa

potential problem.

01/09/28 19:32:29 31SZ3660_049

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This light alerts you that

the passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

A front seat passenger should not

use a cushion or other object as a

backrest. It may prevent the cutoff

system from working properly.

If a small-statured adult leans

sideways, or larger adult slouches

and leans sideways into the

deployment path of the side airbag,

the system may also shut off the side

airbag.

If the side airbag indicator light

comes on, you should have the

passenger sit upright. Once the

passenger is out of the deployment

path of the side airbag, the system

will turn the airbag back on and the

light will go out.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),

the indicator should light briefly and

goout(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’t

light, stays on, or comes on while

driving without a passenger in the

front seat, have the system checked.

To reduce the risk of injury from an

inflating side airbag, your car has an

automatic cutoff system for the

passenger’s side airbag.

Although Acura does not encourage

children to ride in the front seat, this

system is designed to shut off the

side airbag if a child leans sideways

and the child’s head is in the side

airbag deployment path.

Driver and Passenger Safety

How The Side Airbag Indicator

Light Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

01/09/28 19:32:39 31SZ3660_050

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your front and side airbag systems

are virtually maintenance-free, and

there are no parts you can safely

service. However, you must have

your car serviced if:

Any

airbag that has deployed must be

replaced along with the control

unit and other related parts. Do

not try to remove or replace any

airbag by yourself. This must be

done by an Acura dealer or a

knowledgeable body shop.

Together, airbags and

seat belts provide the best

protection.

Tampering could cause

the airbags to deploy, possibly

causing very serious injury.

See page for further information

and precautions relating to your

airbags.

Improperly

replacing or covering front seat-

back covers can prevent your side

airbags from inflating during a

collision.

If rain or spilled water

soaks into a seat-back, it can

prevent the side airbag system

from working properly.

Take your car to an

authorized Acura dealer as soon as

possible. If you ignore this

indication, the airbags might not

inflate when you need them.

185

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

Your airbags ever inflate.

Donotattempttodeactivateyour

airbags.

Do not tamper with airbag

components or wiring for any

reason.

Do not cover or replace front seat-

back covers without consulting an

Acura dealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backs

to water.

The SRS indicator light alerts you

to a problem.

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/09/28 19:32:49 31SZ3660_051

Main Menu

Table of Contents

High levels of carbon monoxide can

collect rapidly in enclosed areas,

such as a garage. Do not run the

engine with the garage door closed.

Even with the door open, run the

engine only long enough to move the

vehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked car,

even in an unconfined area, with the

engine running, adjust the climate

control system as follows:

Your car’s exhaust contains carbon

monoxide gas. You should have no

problem with carbon monoxide

entering the car in normal driving if

you maintain your car properly.

Have the exhaust system inspected

for leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.

You notice a change in the sound

of the exhaust.

Thecarwasinanaccidentthat

may have damaged the underside.

Select the Fresh Air mode.

Select the mode.

Set the fan speed to high.

Set the temperature control to a

comfortable setting.

With the trunk lid open, air flow can

pull exhaust gas into your car’s

interior and create a hazardous

condition. If you must drive with the

trunk lid open, open all the windows

and set the climate control system as

shown below.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver and Passenger Safety

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause

unconsciousness and even kill

you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or

activities that expose you to

carbon monoxide.

01/09/28 19:32:59 31SZ3660_052

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊

These labels are in the locations

shown. They warn you of potential

hazards that could cause serious

injury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read, contact your Acura dealer

for a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models Canadian models

Driver and Passenger Safety

Safety Labels

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DASHBOARD

The U.S. car model

01/09/28 19:33:16 31SZ3660_053

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This section gives information about

the controls and displays that

contribute to the daily operation of

your Acura. All the essential controls

are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 52

...............................Indicator Lights . 53

.............................................Gauges . 58

...............................Speedometer . 58

.................................Tachometer . 58

.....................................Odometer . 59

Trip Meter/Outside

...........Temperature Indicator . 59

...................Temperature Gauge . 60

..................................Fuel Gauge . 60

Maintenance Required

...................................Indicator . 61

Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 62

...................................Headlights . 63

....................Automatic Lighting . 64

............Daytime Running Lights . 65

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 66

................................Turn Signals . 66

...................................Fog Lights . 67

.....................Windshield Wipers . 68

..................Windshield Washers . 70

..........................Hazard Warning . 70

.............Rear Window Defogger . 71

....Steering Wheel Adjustments . 71

...............................Keys and Locks . 74

..............................................Keys . 74

....................Immobilizer System . 75

............................Ignition Switch . 77

......................Power Door Locks . 78

...................Remote Transmitter . 79

..............Childproof Door Locks . 82

...........................................Trunk . 83

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 84

....................................Glove Box . 85

............................Seat Adjustments . 86

.........Driver’s Seat Adjustments . 86

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 88

Front Passenger’s Seat

............................Adjustments . 88

..........................Head Restraints . 88

............................................Armrest . 89

.............................................Mirrors . 91

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 91

Driving Position Memory

..........................................System . 93

....................................Seat Heaters . 95

.........................................Ski Sleeve . 96

..............................Power Windows . 98

.......................................Moonroof . 100

...............................Parking Brake . 102

..................................Digital Clock . 102

........................Sunglasses Holder . 104

...........................Beverage Holder . 105

.................Console Compartment . 106

........................................Coin Box . 106

........................................Sun Visor . 107

................................Vanity Mirror . 107

.............Accessory Power Socket . 108

..........................Cigarette Lighter . 109

.........................................Ashtrays . 110

................................Ceiling Lights . 111

............................Courtesy Lights . 112

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:33:22 31SZ3660_054

Main Menu

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls

DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONN

MMEEMMOORRYY

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW

SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

MMIIRRRROORR

CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

SSYYSSTTEEMM

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE

BBUUTTTTOONN

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL

DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE

HHAANNDDLLEE

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK

SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

((PP.. 7788))

((PP.. 9933))

((PP.. 9988))

((PP.. 8833))

((PP.. 117799))

((PP.. 9911))

((PP.. 110022))

((PP.. 118800))

((PP.. 111144))

((PP.. 112288))

01/09/28 19:33:28 31SZ3660_055

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

DDOOOORR AANNDD BBRRAAKKEE

LLAAMMPP MMOONNIITTOORR

VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY AASSSSIISSTT

SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE

SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP..5555))

((PP..5566))

((PP..5555))

((PP..5566))

((PP..5544))

((PP..5577))

((PP..5544))

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP..5577))

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR

SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP..5555))

((PP..5544))

SSEEAATT BBEELLTT

RREEMMIINNDDEERR

LLIIGGHHTT

LLOOWW FFUUEELL

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP..5577))

LLOOWW OOIILL

PPRREESSSSUURREE

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL

RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLIIGGHHTTSS OONN

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

LLAAMMPP

((PP..229977))

01/09/28 19:33:36 31SZ3660_056

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The engine can be severely damaged

if this light flashes or stays on when

the engine is running. For complete

information, see page .

If this light comes on when the

engine is running, the battery is not

being charged. For complete

information, see page .

This light has two functions:

If you do not fasten your seat belt,

the beeper will stop after a few

seconds but the light stays on until

you do. Both the light and the beeper

stay off if you fasten your seat belt

before turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch ON (II). It is a

reminder to you and your passengers

to protect yourselves by fastening

the seat belts. A beeper also sounds

if you have not fastened your seat

belt.

The instrument panel has many

indicators to give you important

information about your car.

This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch ON (II). It

is a reminder to check the parking

brake. Driving with the parking

brake not fully released can

damage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit after

you have fully released the

parking brake while the engine is

running, or if it comes on while

driving, it can indicate a problem

in the brake system. For complete

information, see page .

295

296

299

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake System

IndicatorSeat Belt Reminder Light

U.S. Canada

01/09/28 19:33:49 31SZ3660_057

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This indicator comes on for a few

seconds when you turn the ignition

switch ON (II). It will then go off if

you have inserted a properly-coded

ignition key. If it is not a properly-

coded key, the indicator will blink

and the engine will not start (see

page ).

This indicator also blinks several

times when you turn the ignition

switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY

(I) or LOCK (0).

See page .

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch ON (II). If it

comes on at any other time, it

indicates a potential problem with

your front airbags. This light will

also alert you to a potential problem

with your side airbags, passenger’s

side airbag automatic cutoff system

or automatic seat belt tensioners.

For complete information, see page

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch ON (II). If it

comes on at any other time, it

indicates that the passenger’s side

airbag has automatically shut off.

For complete information, see page

This indicator reminds you that the

exterior lights are on. It comes on

when the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn the

ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)

or LOCK (0) without turning off the

light switch, this indicator will

remain on. A reminder chime will

also sound when you open the driver’s

door.

This indicator will also come on

when the light switch is in AUTO

and the lights turn on automatically.

This lights when you set the cruise

control. See page for information

on operating the cruise control.

297

158

Immobilizer System

Indicator

Supplemental Restraint

System Indicator

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp

Side Airbag Indicator

Lights On Indicator

(U.S. models only)

Cruise Control Indicator

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:34:05 31SZ3660_058

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This light normally comes on for a

few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II), and when

the ignition switch is turned to

START (III). If this light comes on at

any other time, there is a problem in

theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe

cartoyourdealertohaveitchecked.

With the light on, your car still has

normal braking ability but no anti-

lock. For complete information, see

page .

This indicator normally comes on for

a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II). It comes on as a reminder that you

have turned off the Vehicle

Stability Assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (see

page ).

If this light comes on and stays on at

any other time, or it does not come

on when you turn the ignition switch

ON (II), there is a problem with the

VSA system. Take the car to your

dealer to have it checked. Without

VSA, your car still has normal

driving ability, but will not have VSA

traction and stability enhancement.

See page for more information

on the VSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

This indicator normally comes on for

a few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II). See page

for more information on the

VSA system.

It comes on along with the VSA

system indicator if there is a

problem with the VSA system.

201

199201

Instruments and Controls

Indicator Lights

Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS)

Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist

(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

U.S. Canada

01/09/28 19:34:18 31SZ3660_059

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This light comes on with the high

beam headlights. See page for

information on the headlight

controls.

On Canadian models, this indicator

comes on with reduced brightness

when the Daytime Running Lights

(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (II) with

the headlight switch off and the

parking brake set. It should go off if

youturnontheheadlightsorrelease

the parking brake. If it comes on at

any other time, it means there is a

problem with the DRL. There may

also be a problem with the high

beam headlights.

The left or right turn signal light

blinks when you signal a lane change

or turn. If the light does not blink or

blinks rapidly, it usually means one

of the turn signal bulbs is burned out

(see page ). Replace the bulb as

soon as possible, since other drivers

cannot see that you are signalling.

WhenyouturnontheHazard

Warning switch, both turn signal

lights blink. All turn signals on the

outside of the vehicle should flash.

This light comes on as a reminder

that you must refuel soon.

All the lights in the monitor display

come on for a few seconds when you

turn the ignition switch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazard

when drivers behind you cannot tell

you are braking. Have your brake

lights repaired right away.

The appropriate light comes on in

this display if the trunk or any door

is not closed tightly. If a brake light

does not work, the

indicator comes on when you push

the brake pedal with the ignition

switch ON (II).

260

Canadian models only

High Beam Indicator

‘‘Daytime Running

Lights’’ Indicator

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

Low Fuel Indicator

Door and Brake Lamp Monitor

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

BRAKE LAMP

01/09/28 19:34:32 31SZ3660_060

Main Menu

Table of Contents

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles per

hour (mph). The smaller inner

numbers are the speed in kilometers

per hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometers

per hour (km/h). The smaller inner

numbers are the speed in miles per

hour (mph).

The tachometer shows the engine

speed in revolutions per minute

(rpm). To protect the engine from

damage, never drive with the

tachometer needle in the red zone.

The gauges illuminate when you

turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Gauges

Speedometer

Tachometer

Instruments and Controls

TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

GGAAUUGGEE

SSEELLEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

OODDOOMMEETTEERR

RREESSEETT

BBUUTTTTOONN

FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR//OOUUTTSSIIDDEE

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

01/09/28 19:34:44 31SZ3660_061

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

The trip meter and the outside

temperature indicator use the same

display. To switch the display

between the trip meter and the

outside temperature, press the

Select button. When you turn the

ignition switch to ON (II), what you

last selected is displayed.

The trip meter shows the number of

miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)

driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters, Trip A

and Trip B. Switch between these

and the outside temperature display

by pressing the Select button

repeatedly. Each trip meter works

independently, so you can keep track

of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it and

then press the Reset button until you

hear a beep. Both trip meters will re-

set if the car’s battery goes dead or

is disconnected.

The odometer shows the total dis-

tance your car has been driven. It

measures miles in U.S. models and

kilometers in Canadian models.

It is illegal under U.S. federal law and

Canadian provincial regulations to

disconnect, reset, or alter the

odometer with the intent to change

the number of miles or kilometers

indicated.

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Odometer Trip Meter/Outside Temperature

Indicator

Trip Meter

SSEELLEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSEETT

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:34:54 31SZ3660_062

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This shows the temperature of the

engine’s coolant. During normal

operation, the pointer should rise

from the bottom white mark to about

the middle of the gauge. In severe

driving conditions, such as very hot

weather or a long period of uphill

driving, the pointer may rise to near

the upper white mark. If it reaches

the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the

side of the road. Turn to page for

instructions and precautions on

checking the engine’s cooling

system.

This indicator displays the outside

temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.

models, and in Centigrade in

Canadian models.

In certain weather conditions,

temperature readings near freezing

(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is

forming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is located in

the front bumper. Therefore, the

temperature reading can be affected

by heat reflection from the road sur-

face, engine heat, and the exhaust

from the surrounding traffic. This

can cause the temperature reading

not to be correct when your speed is

under 19 mph (30 km/h).

This shows how much fuel you have.

It is most accurate when the car is on

level ground. It may show slightly

more or less than the actual amount

whenyouaredrivingoncurvyor

hilly roads.

The gauge stays at the same fuel

level reading after you turn off the

ignition. When you add fuel, the

gauge slowly changes to the new

readingafteryouturntheignition

switch back ON (II).

293

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Fuel GaugeTemperature Gauge

Outside Temperature Indicator

01/09/28 19:35:05 31SZ3660_063

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Your dealer will reset this indicator

after completing the scheduled

maintenance. If this maintenance is

done by someone other than your

Acura dealer, reset the indicator as

follows.

Turn off the engine.

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)

after the Maintenance Required

Indicator is reset, it will come on for

two seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and

7,500 miles (12,000 km) this

indicator will light for two seconds

when you first turn the ignition

switch ON (II), and then flash for

ten seconds.

Press and hold the select and reset

buttons next to the instrument pan-

el, then turn the ignition switch

ON (II).

Hold the buttons for

approximately ten seconds until

the indicator resets.

This indicator reminds you that it is

time to take your car in for

scheduled maintenance.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000

km) without having the scheduled

maintenance performed, this

indicator will remain on as a constant

reminder.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules

for Normal and Severe Driving

Conditions on pages .

218 222

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Maintenance Required Indicator

SSEELLEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSEETT

BBUUTTTTOONN

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:35:16 31SZ3660_064

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Thetwoleversonthesteering

column contain controls for driving

features you use most often. The left

lever controls the turn signals,

headlights, and high beams. The

right lever controls the windshield

washers and wipers.

The switch for the hazard warning

lights is on the dashboard to the

right of the steering column.

The controls under the left air vent

areforthecruisecontrol,instrument

panel brightness and the VSA

System.

The switches for the rear window

defogger and fog lights are under

the audio system.

The steering wheel adjustment

switch on the side of the steering

column allows you to tilt and

telescope the steering wheel.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

CCRRUUIISSEE

CCOONNTTRROOLL

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT

PPAANNEELL

BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG

LLIIGGHHTTSS

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD

WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

FFOOGG

LLIIGGHHTTSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

VVEEHHIICCLLEE

SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY

AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTTSS

HHOORRNN

01/09/28 19:35:25 31SZ3660_065

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

To change between low beams and

high beams, pull the turn signal lever

until you hear a click, then let go.

The blue high beam indicator will

light (see page ).

The rotating switch on the left lever

controls the lights. Turning this

switch to the position turns on

the parking lights, taillights, side

marker lights, and rear license plate

lights. Turning the switch to the

position turns on the

headlights.

When the light switch is in either of

these positions, the Lights On

indicator comes on as a reminder.

This light remains on if you leave the

light switch on and turn the ignition

switch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK

(0).

If you leave the lights on with the

ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)

or LOCK (0), you will hear a

reminder chime when you open the

driver’s door.

U.S. models only

Headlights

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:35:35 31SZ3660_066

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The high beams will stay on for as

long as you hold the lever back, no

matter what position the headlight

switch is in.

To flash the high beams, pull the

turn signal lever back lightly, then

release it. The high beams will come

on and go off.

The Automatic Lighting feature

turns on the headlights, all other

exterior lights, and the instrument

panel lights when it senses low

ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turn

the light switch to AUTO at any time.

The lights will come on automatically

when the outside light level becomes

low (at dusk, for example). The

Lights On indicator comes on as a

reminder. The lights and indicator

will turn off automatically when the

system senses high ambient light.

Thelightswillremainonwhenyou

turn off the ignition switch. They will

turn off automatically when you open

the driver’s door. To turn them on

again, either turn the ignition switch

to ON (II) or turn the light switch to

Even with the automatic lighting

feature turned on, we recommend

thatyouturnonthelightsmanually

when driving at night or in a dense

fog, or when you enter dark areas,

such as long tunnels or parking

structures.

On U.S. models

Automatic Lighting

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

AAUUTTOO PPOOSSIITTIIOONN

01/09/28 19:35:44 31SZ3660_067

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The automatic lighting feature is

controlledbyasensorlocatedontop

of the dashboard. Do not cover this

sensor or spill liquids on it.

With the headlight switch off, the

high beam headlights come on with

reduced brightness when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (II) and

release the parking brake. They

remain on until you turn the ignition

off, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normal

operation when you turn them on

with the switch.

Do not leave the light switch in

AUTO if you will not be driving the

car for an extended period (a week

ormore).Youshouldalsoturnoff

the lights if you plan to leave the

engine idling or the engine off for a

long time. This will prevent the

battery from discharging.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Daytime Running Lights

(Canadian Models)

LLIIGGHHTT

SSEENNSSOORR

01/09/28 19:35:52 31SZ3660_068

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The dial on the dashboard to the left

of the instrument panel is used to

adjust the brightness of the lights in

the controls and displays. Turn the

dial to adjust the brightness.

Signal a turn or lane change with this

lever. Push down on the lever to

signal a left turn, and up to signal a

right turn. If you push it up or down

all the way, the turn signal continues

to blink even when you release the

lever. It shuts off automatically as

you complete the turn.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-

ment panel illumination dims when

you turn the light switch to or

. Turning the instrument panel

brightness control fully to the left,

past the detent, will return the instru-

ment panel to its full brightness.

Instrument Panel Brightness Turn Signals

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL

BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS DDIIAALL

01/09/28 19:36:01 31SZ3660_069

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Turn the fog lights on and off by

pressing the button. The indicator in

the button lights to show the fog

lights are on.

To signal a lane change, push lightly

on the turn signal lever in the proper

direction and hold it. The lever will

return to the center position as soon

as you release it.

You can use the fog lights only when

the headlights are on low beam.

They will go off when you turn the

headlights off or onto high beam.

With the light switch in the AUTO

position, you can also use the fog

lights when the headlights turn on

automatically. They will go off when

the headlights turn off.

U.S. models only

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Fog Lights

CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm

01/09/28 19:36:09 31SZ3660_070

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The right lever controls the wind-

shield wipers and washers. The

rotary switch at the end of the lever

has three positions:

INT: intermittent

: low speed

: high speed

In intermittent, the wipers operate

every few seconds. The sweep

interval will change slightly with

speed; getting shorter as you drive

faster. In low speed and high speed,

the wipers run continuously.

You can vary how often the wipers

sweep the windshield by turning the

INT TIME ring next to the rotary

switch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to the

shortest delay, the wipers will

change from intermittent to low

speed operation when vehicle speed

exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

Windshield Wipers

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:36:18 31SZ3660_071

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Adjust the wiper arms to the winter

position by grasping either arm near

the pivot. Pull on the arm, parallel to

the windshield, until it locks in the

higher position. Push the arm in the

other direction to return the wipers

to the summer position.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,

push the control lever down. The

wipers run at high speed until you

release the lever. This gives you a

quick way to clear the windshield.

The windshield wiper arms have two

parked positions: Winter and

Summer. In the winter position, the

arms sit slightly above the edge of

the hood. This reduces the possibili-

ty of damage to the wiper arms or

windshield wiper motor by a build-up

of snow and ice.

A heavy build-up of snow or ice on

the wiper arms will cause them to

automatically park in the winter

position.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Wiper Arms Winter Position

Instruments and Controls

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

01/09/28 19:36:26 31SZ3660_072

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To clean the windshield, pull back on

the wiper control lever. The washers

spray until you release the lever. The

wipers run at low speed while you’re

pulling the lever, then complete one

more sweep of the windshield after

you release it.

Pushtheredbuttontoturnonthe

hazard warning lights (four-way

flashers). This causes all four

outside turn signals and both

indicators in the instrument panel to

flash. Use the hazard warning lights

if you need to park in a dangerous

area near heavy traffic, or if your car

is disabled.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Washers Hazard Warning

CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm

01/09/28 19:36:34 31SZ3660_073

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

See page for important safety

information about how to properly

position the steering wheel.

Your Acura’s steering wheel is

electrically-adjustable for angle and

distance. The adjustment switch is

on the left side of the steering

column. Always adjust the steering

wheel before you begin driving.

Make sure the rear window is clear

and you have good visibility before

starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on

the inside of the rear window can be

accidentally damaged. When

cleaning the glass, always wipe side

to side.

The rear window defogger will clear

fog, frost, and thin ice from the

window. Push the defogger button to

turn it on and off. The light in the

button lights to show the defogger is

on. If you do not turn it off, the

defogger will shut itself off after

about25minutes.Italsoshutsoff

when you turn off the ignition. You

have to turn it on again when you

restart the car.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Steering Wheel AdjustmentsRear Window Defogger

CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm

Adjusting the steering wheel

position while driving may

cause you to lose control of the

car and be seriously injured in a

crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only

when the car is stopped.

01/09/28 19:36:44 31SZ3660_074

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The AUTO switch controls automat-

ic movement of the steering wheel.

When this switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the steering wheel automatical-

ly moves fully in and up when you re-

move the key from the ignition

switch.

Release the switch when the

steering wheel reaches the

desired position. Make sure the

steering wheel points towards

your chest, not toward your face,

andthatyoucanseethe

instrument panel gauges and

warning lights.

Locate the adjustment switch on

the left side of the steering column.

Move the steering wheel, in, out,

up, or down by pushing and

holding the adjustment switch in

that direction.

2.1.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Automatic Movement

AAUUTTOO SSWWIITTCCHH

01/09/28 19:36:53 31SZ3660_075

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The steering wheel then returns to

its original position when you insert

the key back in the ignition switch.

Steering wheel movement is also

controlled by the Driving Position

Memory System (see page ).93

Instruments and Controls

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

01/09/28 19:36:58 31SZ3660_076

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your car comes with two master

keys and a valet key.

Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy

objects on them.

These keys contain electronic

circuits that are activated by the

Immobilizer System. They will not

work to start the engine if the

circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and

high humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.

If they get wet, dry them immedi-

ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.

Do not try to take them apart.

The master key fits all the locks on

your car:

• Ignition

• Doors

• Trunk

• Trunk pass-through cover

•Glovebox

The valet key works only in the

ignition and the door locks. You can

keep the trunk, trunk pass-through

cover, and glove box locked when

you leave your car and the valet key

at a parking facility.

Youshouldhavereceivedakey

number plate with your keys. You

will need this key number if you ever

have to get a lost key replaced. Keep

the plate stored in a safe place. If you

need to replace a key, use only an

Acura-approved key blank.

Keys

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

KKEEYY

NNUUMMBBEERR

PPLLAATTEE

VVAALLEETT

KKEEYY

((GGrraayy))

MMAASSTTEERR

KKEEYYSS

((BBllaacckk))

01/09/28 19:37:09 31SZ3660_077

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your car also comes with two remote

transmitters; see page for an

explanation of the operation.

Youshouldalsoreceiveasmallcase

containing a learning key. It is used

by the Acura dealer to code replace-

ment keys to your car’s Immobilizer

System. It must not be used in your

car’s ignition switch. Store the learn-

ing key with the key number plate in

a safe place. If you attempt to use the learning

key to start your car’s engine, it may

cause a malfunction in the system

that makes your master and valet

keys unusable. If this happens, you

should contact your Acura dealer.

If you need a new key made, take the

key number plate, the learning key,

and all other keys that came with

your car to your Acura dealer.

The Immobilizer System protects

your car from theft. A properly-

coded master or valet key must be

used in the ignition switch for the

engine to start. If an improperly-

coded key (or other device) is used,

the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch to

ON (II), the Immobilizer System

indicator should come on for a few

seconds, then go out. If the indicator

starts to blink, it means the system

does not recognize the coding of the

key. Turn the ignition switch to

LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert

it, and turn the switch to ON (II)

again.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

Learning Key

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:37:20 31SZ3660_078

Main Menu

Table of Contents

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

The system may not recognize your

key’s coding if another immobilizer

key or other metal object is near the

ignition switch when you insert the

key. To make sure the system

recognizes the key code: If you have lost your key and you

cannot start the engine, contact your

Acura dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system

or add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your car undriveable.

Do not keep other immobilizer

keys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,

not metal.

Keep other keys away from your

vehicle’s key and the ignition

switch while trying to start the

engine.

If the system repeatedly does not

recognize the coding of your key,

contact your Acura dealer.

The Immobilizer System indicator

will also blink several times when

you turn the ignition switch from ON

(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:37:30 31SZ3660_079

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

The ignition switch is on the right

side of the steering column. It has

four positions:

•LOCK(0)

• ACCESSORY (I)

• ON (II)

• START (III)

If the front wheels are turned, the

anti-theft lock may sometimes make

it difficult to turn the key from

LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn

the steering wheel to the left or to

the right as you turn the key.

In this position,

you can operate the audio system

and the cigarette lighter.

You can insert or

remove the key only in this position.

To switch from ACCESSORY to

LOCK, you must push the key in

slightly as you turn it. The shift lever

must also be in Park. The anti-theft

lock will lock the steering column

when you remove the key.

This is the normal key

position when driving. All features

and accessories on the car are usable.

Several of the lights on the instru-

ment panel come on as a test when

you turn the ignition switch from

ACCESSORY to ON.

Use this position

only to start the engine. The switch

returns to ON (II) when you let go of

the key.

The engine will not start if the

Immobilizer System does not

recognize the key’s coding (see page

You will hear a reminder beeper if

you leave the key LOCK (0) or

ACCESSORY (I) position and open

thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto

turn off the beeper.

Ignition Switch

ACCESSORY (I)

LOCK (0)

ON (II)

START (III)

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:37:41 31SZ3660_080

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Each front door has a master door

lock switch. Either switch locks and

unlocks all doors. Push the switch

down to lock all doors, and up to

unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab at the top of

the door. When you push down the

lock tab on the driver’s door, all

doors lock. Pulling up the lock tab on

the driver’s door only unlocks that

door.Thelocktaboneach

passenger’s door only locks and

unlocks that door.

To lock any passenger’s door when

getting out of the car, push the lock

tab down and close the door. To lock

the driver’s door, remove the key

from the ignition switch and push

the lock tab down or push the master

switch down, then close the door.

All doors can be locked from the

outsidebyusingthekeyineither

front door. To unlock only the driver’s

door from the outside, insert the key

in the driver’s door lock, turn the key

and release it. If you turn the key

and hold it, all doors will unlock. All

four doors will unlock when you

unlock the passenger’s door with the

key.

Power Door Locks

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH LLOOCCKK TTAABB

01/09/28 19:37:50 31SZ3660_081

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you forget and leave the key in the

ignition switch, Lockout Prevention

will not allow you to lock the driver’s

door. With the driver’s door open

andthekeyintheignition,both

master door lock switches are

disabled. However, if the driver’s

door is not open, the master door

lock switches are not disabled.

Pushing the switch down on the

open passenger’s door will lock all

doors. If you try to lock an open

driver’s door by pushing in the lock

tab, the tabs on all doors pop out.

Pushinginthelocktabonthe

passenger’s door only locks that door.

The ceiling lights (if the ceiling light

switch is in the center position) and

the door courtesy lights will come on

when you press the UNLOCK button.

If you do not open any door, the

lights stay on for about 10 seconds,

then fade out. If you relock the doors

with the remote transmitter before

10 seconds have elapsed, the lights

will go off immediately.

You can lock and unlock your car

with the remote transmitter. When

you push the LOCK button, all doors

lock. You will hear a beep, and the

parking lights, taillights and license

plate lights will flash once.

When you push the UNLOCK button

once, only the driver’s door unlocks.

The remaining doors unlock when

you push the button a second time.

You will hear two beeps, and the

outside lights will flash twice, each

time you push the button.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

Lockout Prevention

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKK

BBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKK

BBUUTTTTOONN

TTRRUUNNKK

RREELLEEAASSEE

BBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICC

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:38:00 31SZ3660_082

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you unlock the doors with the

remote transmitter, but do not open

any of the doors within 30 seconds,

the doors automatically relock and

the security system sets.

You cannot lock any of the doors

with the remote transmitter if any

door is not fully closed or the key is

in the ignition switch. You cannot

unlock any of the doors with the key

in the ignition switch.

To open the trunk, push the Trunk

Release button for approximately

one second.

You can open the trunk with the

remote transmitter regardless of the

position of the main switch in the

glove box. The trunk will not open if

the key is in the ignition switch.

You can program the keyless entry

system so it does not beep when you

lock and unlock the doors. This

procedure only turns off the beep;

the exterior lights will still flash.

To turn this feature off, stand near

the car with the remote transmitter.

Press and hold the Trunk Release

button, then press the Lock button

within one second. You should see

the LED on the remote transmitter

come on for one second. Release the

buttons after the LED goes out.

To turn this feature on, repeat the

above procedure. You should see the

LED blink twice.

After you program the remote

transmitter, make sure the trunk lid

is closed.

Panic mode allows you to remotely

activate your car’s security system to

attract attention. When activated, the

horn will sound, and the exterior

lights will flash, for about 30 seconds.

To activate panic mode, press and

hold the PANIC button for about two

seconds.

To cancel Panic mode before 30

seconds, press any button on the

remote transmitter. You can also

turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if the

ignition switch is in the ON (II)

position.

Turning the Beep Off and On Panic Mode

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:38:11 31SZ3660_083

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＋

CONTINUED

When the remote transmitter’s

battery begins to get weak, it may

take several pushes on the button to

lock or unlock the doors and the

tailgate, and the LED will get dim.

Replace the battery as soon as

possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a cloth

on the edge of the transmitter and

remove the upper half by carefully

prying on the edge with a small flat-

tip screwdriver.

Remove the old battery and note the

polarity. Make sure the polarity of

the new battery is the same ( side

facing up), then insert it in the

transmitter.

Snapthetwohalvesofthe

transmitter case back together.

Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:38:21 31SZ3660_084

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The childproof door locks are

designed to prevent children seated

in the rear from accidentally opening

the rear doors. Each rear door has a

lock lever near the edge. With the

lever in the LOCK position, the door

cannot be opened from the inside

regardless of the position of the lock

tab. To open the door, pull the lock

tab up and use the outside door

handle.

Avoid severe shock to the trans-

mitter, such as dropping or throwing

it. Also, protect it from extreme hot

or cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with a

soft cloth. Do not use strong

cleaners or solvents that could harm

the case. Immersing the transmitter

in any liquid will harm the trans-

mitter and cause it to not function

properly.

If you lose a transmitter, you will

need to have the replacement

programmed to your car’s system by

your Acura dealer. Any other

transmitters you have will also need

to be reprogrammed.

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Childproof Door Locks

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Transmitter Care

LLEEVVEERR

01/09/28 19:38:32 31SZ3660_085

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Youcanopenthetrunkinthree

ways:

To protect items in the trunk when

you need to give the key to someone

else:

Disable the trunk release button

on the driver’s door by turning off

the trunk main switch in the glove

box.

Press the trunk release button on

the driver’s door.

Usethemasterkeytoopenthe

trunk lock. The valet key does not

work in this lock.

Press and hold the trunk release

button on the remote transmitter

for approximately one second (see

page ).

To close the trunk, press down on

the trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading and

weight limit information. Keep the

trunk lid closed at all times while

driving to avoid damaging the lid,

and to prevent exhaust gas from

getting into the interior. See

on page .

186

CONTINUED

Trunk

Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

TTRRUUNNKK MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHHTTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:38:47 31SZ3660_086

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Parents should decide if their

children should be shown how to use

this feature.

For more information about child

safety, see page .

Make sure the trunk pass-through

cover is locked (see page ).

Lock the glove box with the

master key.

Give the person the valet key.

Even if the trunk main switch is

turned off, you can open the trunk

with the master key or the remote

transmitter.

To open the trunk, push the release

lever to the left.

As a safety feature, your car has a

release lever on the trunk latch so

the trunk can be opened from the

inside.

Emergency Trunk Opener

(U.S. models only)

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:38:58 31SZ3660_087

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The glove box light comes on only

when the parking lights are on.

Open the glove box by pulling the

bottom of the handle. Close it with a

firm push. Lock or unlock the glove

box with the master key.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger

inacrash,evenifthe

passenger is wearing the seat

belt.

Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.

01/09/28 19:39:05 31SZ3660_088

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Pull up or push down on the front of

the switch to move the seat bottom’s

front edge up or down. Pull up or

push down on the rear of the switch

to move the rear of the seat bottom

up or down.Push the horizontal switch forward

or backward to move the seat

forward or backward.

The long horizontal switch adjusts

the seat bottom in several directions.

The short vertical switch adjusts the

seat-back angle.

Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.

Your Acura has power adjustments

for both front seats. The two power

seat adjustment switches are on the

outside edge of the seat bottom.

You can adjust the power seats with

the ignition switch in any position.

See pages for important safety

information and warnings about how to

properly position seats and seat-backs.

12 14

Driver’s Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:39:16 31SZ3660_089

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The driver’s seat includes a memory

feature. Two seat positions can be

stored in separate memories. You

canthenselectamemorizedposition

by pushing the appropriate memory

button. Refer to page for how to

memorize and select the seat

positions.

Pull the center of the horizontal

switch up to raise the seat. Push it

down to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle by

pushing the rear switch in the

direction you want to move.

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:39:24 31SZ3660_090

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the right side of the

seat-back. Pivot the lever forward

until it stops, then let it return. Doing

this several times adjusts the lumbar

support through its full range.

The seat adjustment switches are on

the outside edge of the seat bottom.

Push the long horizontal switch

forward or backward to move the

seat bottom in that direction.

Adjust the seat-back angle by

pushing the vertical switch in the

direction you want to move.

The head restraints help protect you

and your passengers from whiplash

and other injuries. They are most

effective when you adjust them so

the back of the occupant’s head rests

against the center of the restraint. A

taller person should adjust the

restraint as high as possible.

See page for important safety

information and a warning about how to

properly position the head restraints.

Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Passenger’s Seat

Adjustments

Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:39:33 31SZ3660_091

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The lid of the console compartment

canbeusedasanarmrestatthe

high or low position. To raise the

armrest, push the button on the lid.

Make sure the armrest is securely

latched. To lower it, press the button

and push the armrest down until it

latches.

Make sure the passengers’ hands or

fingersareawayfromthearmrest

before pushing it down.

To remove a head restraint for

cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as

it will go. Push the release button

and pull the restraint out of the seat-

back.

The head restraints adjust for height

and tilt. You need both hands to

adjust the restraint. Do not attempt

to adjust it while driving. To raise it,

pull upward. To lower the restraint,

push the release button sideways

and push the restraint down. To

adjust the tilt, pivot the head

restraint to the desired position.

Armrest

Seat Adjustments, Armrest

Instruments and Controls

PPuusshh

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:39:42 31SZ3660_092

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Make sure all items in the trunk and

those extending through the pass-

through are secured.

For security, this cover can be

locked and unlocked only with the

master key. To lock the cover, insert

thekeyandturnitclockwise.

Never drive with this cover open and

the trunk lid open.

See on

page .

The rear seat armrest is located at

the center of the rear seat. Pivot it

down to use it.

The pass-through cover can be

opened from either side; it folds

forward onto the center armrest.

Open the cover by sliding the knob

downward and pushing or pulling on

the cover. To close the cover, swing

it up and push firmly on the top.

Make sure it latches properly.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Trunk Pass-through Cover

Armrest

Instruments and Controls

KKNNOOBB

LLIIDD

01/09/28 19:39:51 31SZ3660_093

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Adjust the outside mirrors with the

adjustment button on the driver’s

door armrest:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L

(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s

side).

Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before

you start driving.

The inside mirror has an automatic

anti-glare mechanism. When the

AUTO switch is pushed in, the

indicator will light. When the mirror

senses light from the headlights of

the car behind you, the mirror

surface will automatically darken to

reduce the glare.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

Instruments and Controls

SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

OONN SSTTAARR

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII GGLLAARREE

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AANNTTII GGLLAARREE SSWWIITTCCHH

01/09/28 19:40:01 31SZ3660_094

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The outside mirrors are heated to re-

move fog and frost. With the ignition

switchON(II),turnontheheaters

by pressing the button. The light in

the button comes on as a reminder.

Press the button again to turn the

heaters off.

When you finish, move the

selector switch to the center (off)

position. This turns off the

adjustment button so you can’t

move a mirror out of position by

accidentally bumping the button.

Move the mirror right, left, up or

down by pushing the adjustment

button in that direction.

Outside mirror positions can be

stored in the driving position

memory system (see page ).

Mirrors

Instruments and Controls

HHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONN

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:40:09 31SZ3660_095

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Press and release the MEMO

buttononthecontrolpanel.You

will hear a beep. Immediately

press and hold one of the memory

buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two

beeps. The indicator light in the

memory button will come on. The

current positions of the driver’s

seat, steering wheel, and outside

mirrors are now stored.

Your Acura has a memory feature

for the steering wheel, driver’s seat,

and outside mirror positions.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

You cannot add a new driving

position in the memory unless the

ignition switch is ON (II). You can

recall a memorized position with

the ignition switch in any position.

Store a driving position as explained

in this section only when the car is

parked.

Two seat, steering wheel, and

outside mirror positions for different

drivers or driving conditions can be

stored in separate memories. You

select a memorized position by

pushing the appropriate button.

Adjust the seat to a comfortable

position (see page ). Adjust

the steering wheel to a

comfortable position (see page

). Adjust the outside mirrors

for best visibility (see page ).

CONTINUED

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments and Controls

MMEEMMOO BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:40:19 31SZ3660_096

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Doing any of the following after

pressing the MEMO button will

cancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory button

within 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat or steering

position.

You can select memorized positions

as follows.

Make sure the parking brake is set

and the shift lever is in Park.

Insert the key in the ignition

switch. If you do not insert the key

in the ignition switch, the steering

wheel will not adjust to the

memorized position until you do.

Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then

release the button.

The system will move the seat,

steering wheel and outside mirrors

to the memorized positions. The

indicator light in the selected

memory button will flash during

movement. When the adjustments

are complete, you will hear two

beeps and the indicator light will

remain on.

Readjusting the outside mirror

position.

Each memory button stores only one

driving position. Storing a new

position erases the previous setting

stored in that button’s memory. If

you want to add a new position while

retaining the current one, use the

other memory button.

All stored driving positions will be

lost if your car’s battery goes dead or

is disconnected.

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments and Controls

MMEEMMOORRYY BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/09/28 19:40:31 31SZ3660_097

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Press any button on the control

panel: MEMO, 1 or 2.

Push any of the adjustment

switches for the seat or steering

wheel.

Shift out of Park.

If desired, you can use the adjust-

ment switches to change the posi-

tions of the seat, steering wheel or

outside mirrors after they are in

their memorized position. To keep

this driving position for later use,

you must store it in the driving posi-

tion memory.

To stop the system’s automatic ad-

justment;

Adjust the outside mirrors.

If you select a memorized position

without inserting the key in the

ignition switch, only the seat and

outside mirrors will adjust. To get

the system to also adjust the steering

wheel, insert the key in the ignition

switch. You will hear two beeps

when it is complete.

Both front seats are equipped with

seat heaters. The ignition switch

must be ON (II) to use them. Push

the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly

heat up the seat. After the seat

reaches a comfortable temperature,

select LO by pushing the back of the

switch. This will keep the seat warm.

CONTINUED

Seat Heaters

Driving Position Memory System, Seat Heaters

Instruments and Controls

SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERRSS

01/09/28 19:40:43 31SZ3660_098

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The HI or LO indicator lights and

remains lit until you turn it off by

pushing the opposite side of the

switch lightly. The indicator will turn

off.

Follow these precautions whenever

you use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat the

seats quickly. Select the LO

setting when the seats feel warm.

The HI setting draws large

amounts of current from the

battery.

Do not use the seat heaters, even

on the LO setting, if the engine is

left idling for an extended period.

They can weaken the battery,

causing hard starting.In LO, the heater runs continuously.

It does not cycle with temperature

changes.

In HI, the heater turns off when the

seat gets warm, and turns back on

after the seat’s temperature drops. It

continues to cycle as long as you

leave it set on HI. The HI indicator

remains lit as a reminder that you

have the heater on.

Because of the sensors for the side

airbag system, there is no heater in

the passenger’s seat-back.

To use the ski sleeve:

Pull down the rear seat armrest.

Open the trunk pass-through

cover by sliding the knob down-

ward and pulling on the cover.

Theskisleeveallowsyoutocarry

skis or other long objects safely

without soiling or damaging the

interior of your car. It attaches to the

trunk pass-through.

Ski Sleeve

Seat Heaters, Ski Sleeve

Instruments and Controls

KKNNOOBB

LLIIDD

01/09/28 19:40:56 31SZ3660_099

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Follow these precautions when you

use the ski sleeve:

Use the strap on the ski sleeve to

secure it tightly to the rear seat

armrest.

Attach the ski sleeve to the trunk

pass-through.

Load the skis into the ski sleeve

fromthetrunk.Makesurethetip

of the ski sleeve is resting on the

center console.

Afteruse,makesuretheski

sleeve is dry both inside and out

before folding it up for storage.

This will help to prevent mildew.

Open the trunk. Remove the ski

sleeve from its storage bag.

Donottransportskisthatare

longer or heavier than these limits:

Maximum length: 84 in (215 cm)

Maximum weight: 55 lbs (25 kg)

Ski Sleeve

Instruments and Controls

01/09/28 19:41:06 31SZ3660_100

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Each door has a switch that controls

its window. To open the window,

push the switch down and hold it.

Release the switch when you want

the window to stop. Close the

window by pulling back on the

switch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has a

master power window control panel.

To open any of the passengers’ win-

dows, push down on the appropriate

switch and hold it until the window

reaches the desired position. To

close the window, pull back on the

window switch. Release the switch

when the window gets to the position

you want.

Your car’s windows are electrically-

powered. Turn the ignition switch to

ON(II)toraiseorloweranywindow.

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls

MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window on

someone’s hands or fingers can

cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before

closing them.

01/09/28 19:41:13 31SZ3660_101

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

The MAIN switch controls power to

the passenger’s window. With this

switch off, the passenger’s window

cannot be raised or lowered. The

MAIN switch does not affect the driv-

er’s window. Keep the MAIN switch

offwhenyouhavechildreninthecar

so they do not injure themselves by

operating the window unintentionally.

The lights inside the switches come

onwhenyouturntheparkinglights

or headlights on.

The master control panel also con-

tains these extra features:

To open the driver’s

window fully, push the window

switch firmly down, then release it.

The window automatically goes

down all the way. To stop the

window from going all the way down,

pull back on the window switch

briefly.

To open or close the driver’s window

partially, push down or pull back on

the window switch lightly and hold it.

The window will stop when you

release the switch.

To close the driver’s window fully,

pull back the window switch firmly,

then release it. The window

automatically goes all the way up. To

stop the window from going all the

way up, push down on the window

switch briefly.

If the driver’s window runs into any

obstacle while it is closing

automatically, it will stop, and then

reverse direction. To close the

window, remove the obstacle, then

use the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the

window is almost closed. You should

always check that all passengers and

objects are away from the window

before closing it.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

AUTO

Power Windows

Auto Reverse

01/09/28 19:41:22 31SZ3660_102

Main Menu

Table of Contents

There are two switches on the

ceiling near the front ceiling light.

The ignition switch must be ON (II).

To open the moonroof, pull the

OPEN/CLOSE switch backward and

hold it until the moonroof reaches

the desired position.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, or the driver’s window

fuse is removed, the AUTO function

will be disabled. The power window

system needs to be reset after

reconnecting the battery or installing

the fuse. You should do the following.

Pull back on the driver’s window

switch to close the window

completely then hold the switch

forafurthersecondortwomore.

Start the engine. Push down on

the driver’s window switch until

the window is fully open.

If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have your

car checked by an Acura dealer.

The power window system has a key-

off delay function. The windows will

stilloperateforuptotenminutes

after you turn off the ignition.

Opening either front door cancels

the delay function. You must turn

the ignition switch ON (II) again

before you can raise or lower the

windows.1.

Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

Instruments and Controls

100

OOPPEENN//CCLLOOSSEE

SSWWIITTCCHH

01/09/28 19:41:32 31SZ3660_103

Main Menu

Table of Contents

When you push and hold the TILT-

UP switch, the rear of the moonroof

will tilt up. To close it, push the

OPEN/CLOSE switch forward. If

you pull the switch backward and

hold it, the moonroof will tilt down

and then open. The AUTO function

cannot work with the moonroof in

the tilt up position.

To close the moonroof, push the

OPEN/CLOSE switch forward and

hold it. The moonroof will not close

completely; it will stop about 5.1

inches (130 mm) away from being

closed. Make sure your passengers

are clear of the moonroof, then

release the switch and push it

forward again to close the moonroof

completely.

The moonroof has an AUTO

function. To open the moonroof fully,

pull the OPEN/CLOSE switch

backward firmly until it clicks, then

release it. The moonroof opens

automatically all the way. To stop the

moonroof from opening all the way,

push the switch forward briefly. To

open the moonroof partially, pull the

OPEN/CLOSE switch backward

lightly and hold it until the moonroof

reaches the desired position. The

AUTO function only works to open

the moonroof.

Moonroof

Instruments and Controls

101

TTIILLTT--UUPP SSWWIITTCCHH

If you try to open the moonroof in

below-f reezing temperatures, or when

it is covered with snow or ice, you can

damage the moonroof panel or motor.

01/09/28 19:41:39 31SZ3660_104

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The digital clock displays the time

with the ignition switch ON (II). To

see the time with the ignition off,

press and hold the wide button to the

right of the clock.

To apply the parking brake, depress

the pedal fully. To release it, pull the

release lever. The parking brake

light on the instrument panel should

go out when the parking brake is

fully released with the engine

running (see page ). If you try to

drive the car without releasing the

parking brake, the ABS indicator

maycomeon,andtheABSmaynot

work properly. The VSA system

indicator will also come on along

with the ABS indicator (see page

199

3.5 RL without Navigation System

Parking Brake Digital Clock

Parking Brake, Digital Clock

Instruments and Controls

102

PPAARRKKIINNGG

BBRRAAKKEE PPEEDDAALL

RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR

Driving the car with the parking brake

applied can damage the rear brakes

and axles.

01/09/28 19:41:49 31SZ3660_105

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To set the clock:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II) to

display the time.

Swing down the front cover of the

wide button to the right of the

clock display. You will see HOUR,

MIN., and RESET buttons.

Press and hold the HOUR button

until the hour advances to the

desired hour.

Press and hold the MIN. button

until the numbers advance to the

desired time.

You can use the RESET button to

quickly set the time to the nearest

hour. If the displayed time is before

the half hour, pressing the RESET

buttonsetstheclockbacktothe

previous hour. If the displayed time

is after the half hour, pressing the

RESET button sets the clock for-

ward to the beginning of the next

hour.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.

1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example:

Digital Clock

Instruments and Controls

103

HHOOUURR RREESSEETTMMIINN..

01/09/28 19:41:59 31SZ3660_106

Main Menu

Table of Contents

You may also store small items in

this holder. Make sure they are

small enough to let the holder close

and latch, and that they are not

heavy enough to cause the holder to

pop open while driving.

To open the sunglasses holder, push

on the front edge. It will unlatch and

swing down. To close it, push it until

it latches. Make sure the holder is

closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglasses

may not fit in the holder.

Sunglasses Holder

Instruments and Controls

104

PPuusshh

SSUUNNGGLLAASSSSEESS HHOOLLDDEERR

01/09/28 19:42:06 31SZ3660_107

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To use the front beverage holder,

push on the lid. The beverage holder

will pop out. To close it, push

it until it latches.

Be careful when you are using the

beverage holder. A spilled liquid that

is very hot can scald you or your

passengers. Spilled liquids can also

damage the upholstery, carpeting,

and electrical components in the

interior.

The rear seat also has a beverage

holder in the center armrest. To use

it, pivot the armrest down.

Beverage Holder

Instruments and Controls

105

01/09/28 19:42:14 31SZ3660_108

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The coin box is located under the air

vent. To open the coin box, push on

the front. To close it, push it in until

it clicks.

Youcanputsmallitemsinthetray

located in the console compartment

lid. To use the tray, pull the right

lever and lift up the armrest pad.

To open the console compartment,

pull the left lever and lift the lid.

To close, lower the lid and push it

down until it latches.

Coin BoxConsole Compartment

Console Compartment, Coin Box

Instruments and Controls

106

LLEEVVEERR

CCOOIINN BBOOXXCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

LLEEVVEERR

01/09/28 19:42:25 31SZ3660_109

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To use the sun visor, pull it down.

You can also use the sun visor at the

side window. Remove the support

rod from the clip and swing the sun

visor toward the side window. In this

position, the sun visor can be

extended by sliding out the

extension.

Touseavanitymirroronthebackof

the sun visor, pull up the cover.

Make sure you put the sun visor

back in place when you are getting

into or out of the car. Do not use the

sun visor extension over the rear

view mirror.

The light beside the mirror comes

on when you pull up the cover.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

Instruments and Controls

107

EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

01/09/28 19:42:35 31SZ3660_110

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To use the accessory power socket,

pull down on the cover. The ignition

switch must be in ACCESSORY (I)

or ON (II).

This socket is intended to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories

that are rated 120 watts or less (10

amps).

It will not power an automotive type

cigarette lighter element.

Route the wire through the notch in

the edge of the console compartment.

Accessory Power Socket

Instruments and Controls

108

NNOOTTCCHH

AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT

01/09/28 19:42:43 31SZ3660_111

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The cigarette lighter is next to the

front ashtray under the ashtray lid.

Open the lid by pushing on it.

The ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY(I)orON(II)forthe

cigarette lighter to work. To heat up

the lighter, push it in. It will pop out

when it is ready for use. Do not hold

the lighter in while it is heating up,

you could cause it to overheat.

Cigarette Lighter

Instruments and Controls

109

CCIIGGAARREETTTTEE LLIIGGHHTTEERR

PPuusshh

01/09/28 19:42:49 31SZ3660_112

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The rear ashtrays are in the front

lower corner of each door. Open the

ashtraybyswingingtheupperedge

of the lid down. To remove the

ashtray for emptying, open it, then

lift up and out.

Openthefrontashtraybypushing

on the lid. To close the ashtray, push

it in until it clicks shut. To remove it

for emptying, grasp the tab on the

left side of the inner tray and lift it up

and out.

Ashtrays

Instruments and Controls

110

IINNNNEERR TTRRAAYY

AASSHHTTRRAAYYTTAABB

Use the ashtray only f or cigarettes,

cigars, and other smoking materials.

To prevent a possible f ire and damage

to your car, don’t put paper or other

things that can burn in the ashtray.

01/09/28 19:42:55 31SZ3660_113

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Both front and rear ceiling lights

contain a main light as well as two

spotlights.

With the light switch in the AUTO

position, you can use the rear

spotlights only when the headlights

turn on automatically.The front ceiling light has a three-

position switch. With the switch in

the OFF position (far left), the main

lights do not come on. In the center

position, the main lights come on

when you open any door. After all

doors are closed tightly, they dim

slightly then fade out in about 10

seconds. In the ON position (far

right), the main lights stay on

continuously.

Turn on the spotlights in the front

and rear ceiling lights by pushing the

grey button next to each light. Push

the button again to turn it off. You

can use the front spotlights at all

times. The rear spotlights only light

when the parking lights or head-

lights are on.

U.S. models only

Ceiling Lights

Instruments and Controls

111

FFRROONNTT

OOFFFF

OONN

RREEAARR

01/09/28 19:43:05 31SZ3660_114

Main Menu

Table of Contents

In addition to the ceiling lights, your

Acura has courtesy lights in each

door and the ignition switch.

Even if the door is open, the lights

will turn off after three minutes

when the key is not in the ignition

switch or the ignition switch is in the

LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)

position, and the light switch is in the

off position.

The door courtesy lights and ceiling

lights (with the switch in the center

position) come on when you unlock

the door with the key, lock tab on

the driver’s door, master door lock

switch,orremotetransmitter(see

page ). If you relock the driver’s

door or close the driver’s door with

the key in the ignition switch, the

lights turn off immediately.

Otherwise, they remain on, then fade

out in about 10 seconds.

The door courtesy lights come on

whenever you open any door. After

all doors are closed tightly, they dim

slightly then fade out in about 10

seconds.

Thecourtesylightintheignition

switchcomesonwhenyouopenthe

driver’s door. It remains on about 10

seconds after the door is closed.

The door courtesy lights and ceiling

lights (with the switch in the center

position) also come on when you

remove the key from the ignition

switch. If you do not open a door,

they stay on, then fade out in about

10 seconds.

Courtesy Lights

Instruments and Controls

112

01/09/28 19:43:14 31SZ3660_115

Main Menu

Table of Contents

...............Climate Control System . 114

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 116

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 117

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 121

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 122

........................Rear Ventilation . 126

Sunlight Sensor/

............Temperature Sensor . 127

................................Audio System . 128

AM/FM/Cassette Stereo

........................Audio System . 128

.................Operating the Radio . 129

.................Adjusting the Sound . 132

............Audio System Lighting . 133

Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 133

............Tape Search Functions . 134

.....Operating the CD Changer . 136

.................Operating the Radio . 139

.................Adjusting the Sound . 142

............Audio System Lighting . 143

....................Radio Frequencies . 143

........................Radio Reception . 143

Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 145

............Tape Search Functions . 145

Caring for the Cassette

.....................................Player . 148

.....Operating the CD Changer . 149

........Loading the CD Changer . 151

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 153

CD Changer Error

.............................Indications . 154

...........Remote Audio Controls . 155

.......................Theft Protection . 156

............................Security System . 157

...............................Cruise Control . 158

HomeLink Universal

...........................Transceiver . 162

...............Customer Assistance . 162

.Important Safety Precautions . 162

..................Training HomeLink . 163

Training with a Rolling Code

....................................System . 164

...........................Erasing Codes . 166

............................................OnStar . 167

3.5 RL without Navigation System

3.5 RL with Navigation System

3.5 RL without Navigation System

3.5 RL with Navigation System

Comfort and Convenience Features

113

01/09/28 19:43:18 31SZ3660_116

Main Menu

The automatic climate control

system in your Acura picks the

proper combination of air condi-

tioning, heating, and ventilation to

maintain the interior temperature

you select. The system also adjusts

the fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from the

vents in the center and each side of

the dashboard is adjustable. Move

the tab in the center of each vent up-

and-down and side-to-side.

Thesideventscanbeopenedand

closed with the dials next to them.

The climate control system draws air

through the exterior vents at the

bottom of the windshield. Keep

these vents clear of leaves and other

debris.

For the climate control system to

provide heating and cooling, the

engine must be running.

In the rear seat, you can also adjust

the ventilation when the climate con-

trol system is on (see page ).126

Comfort and Convenience Features

Climate Control System

114

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTTSS

OOppeenn

CClloossee

SSIIDDEE VVEENNTTSS

01/09/28 19:43:28 31SZ3660_117

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

115

01/09/28 19:43:32 31SZ3660_118

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Pressing the OFF button shuts the

climate control system completely

off. Keep the system completely off

only for short periods. To keep stale

air and mustiness from collecting,

you should have the fan running at

all times.

When you set the temperature to its

lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper

limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs

at full cooling or heating only. It does

not regulate the interior temperature.

When the temperature is set

between the lower and upper limits,

the system regulates the interior

temperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects the

proper mix of conditioned and/or

heated air that will, as quickly as

possible, raise or lower the interior

temperature from its current level to

the set temperature.

To put the Automatic Climate

Control in fully-automatic mode,

press the AUTO button and set the

fan control dial to AUTO, then set

the desired temperature by turning

the temperature control dial. You will

see FULL AUTO in the system’s

display. The light above either the

or button also goes

on to show you which is selected.

In cold weather, the fan will not

come on automatically until the car

has been driven for a short time and

the heater starts to develop warm air.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Fully-automatic Operation

3.5 RL without Navigation System

116

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOO

DDIISSPPLLAAYY

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL

DDIIAALL

AAUUTTOO

BBUUTTTTOONN

OOFFFF

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:43:42 31SZ3660_119

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

You can manually select various

functions of the Climate Control

system when it is in FULL AUTO.

All other features remain auto-

matically controlled. Making any

manual selection causes the word

FULL to go out.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-

tem cannot regulate the inside tem-

perature if you set the dial below the

outside temperature. With the A/C

on, use the temperature control dial

to adjust the temperature of the air

flow to a comfortable setting.

With the A/C in economy mode, you

will see A/C ECON in the system’s

display. Use this mode to get better

fuel economy.

Press the A/C button to operate the

air conditioning. Each time you press

the A/C button, the display shows

the mode: A/C ECON, A/C OFF, or

A/C ON.

In this mode, you may feel a slight re-

duction in cooling efficiency. If you

want more cooling, select A/C ON or

FULL AUTO.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

117

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG

BBUUTTTTOONN

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTEEDD AAIIRR FFRREESSHH AAIIRR

01/09/28 19:43:52 31SZ3660_120

Main Menu

Table of Contents

You can manually select the fan

speedbyturningthefancontroldial.

When you turn the dial clockwise,

the fan is taken out of automatic

mode and starts to run at its lowest

speed. Turning the dial fully

clockwise increases the fan’s speed,

which increases air flow.

Use the MODE button to select the

vents the air flows from. Some air

will flow from the side vents and the

dashboard corner vents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODE

button, the display shows the mode

selected. Press the button four times

to see all the modes.

These two buttons control the

source of the air going into the sys-

tem. In Fresh Air mode ( ),

air is brought in from outside the ve-

hicle. In Recirculation mode

( ), air from the car’s interior

is sent through the system again.

You can, for example, manually put

the system in recirculation mode

when driving through an area of

smoke or fumes. When you press

the or button, the

light in that button comes on.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Mode Button

Recirculated and Fresh Air

Fan Control Dial

118

MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTEEDD AAIIRR FFRREESSHH AAIIRR

01/09/28 19:44:00 31SZ3660_121

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

The main air flow is divided

between the dashboard vents and

the floor vents.

The main air flow is divided

between the floor vents and de-

froster vents at the base of the wind-

shield.

The main air flow comes

from the floor vents.

The main air flow comes

from the dashboard vents.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

119

01/09/28 19:44:09 31SZ3660_122

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The button directs the main

air flow to the windshield for faster

defrosting. It also overrides any

MODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/C

turns on automatically and the

system selects Fresh Air mode. For

faster defrosting, manually set the

fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso

increase air flow to the windshield by

closing the side vents in the

dashboard.

When you turn off by

pressing the button again, the

system returns to its former settings.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

120

01/09/28 19:44:16 31SZ3660_123

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To put the Automatic Climate

Control in fully-automatic mode,

press the AUTO button and set the

fan control dial to AUTO, then set

the desired temperature by turning

the temperature control dial. You will

see FULL AUTO in the system’s

display. The light above the

buttonalsoshowsyouwhich

mode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, is

selected.

When you set the temperature to its

lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper

limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs

at full cooling or heating only. It does

not regulate the interior temperature.

When the temperature is set

between the lower and upper limits,

the system regulates the interior

temperature to the set value.

The system automatically selects the

proper mix of conditioned and/or

heated air that will, as quickly as

possible, raise or lower the interior

temperature from its current level to

the set temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will not

come on automatically until the car

has been driven for a short time and

the heater starts to develop warm air.

Pressing the OFF button shuts the

climate control system completely

off. Keep the system completely off

only for short periods. To keep stale

air and mustiness from collecting,

you should have the fan running at

all times.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Fully-automatic Operation

3.5 RL with Navigation System

121

FFUULLLL AAUUTTOO

DDIISSPPLLAAYY

OOFFFF

BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO

BBUUTTTTOONN

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL

DDIIAALL

01/09/28 19:44:25 31SZ3660_124

Main Menu

Table of Contents

You can manually select various

functions of the Climate Control

system when it is in FULL AUTO.

All other features remain auto-

matically controlled. Making any

manual selection causes the word

FULL to go out.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-

tem cannot regulate the inside tem-

perature if you set the dial below the

outside temperature. With the A/C

on, use the temperature control dial

to adjust the temperature of the air

flow to a comfortable setting.

With the A/C in economy mode, you

will see A/C ECON in the system’s

display. Use this mode to get better

fuel economy.

Press the A/C button to operate the

air conditioning. Each time you press

the A/C button, the display shows

the mode: A/C ECON, A/C OFF, or

A/C ON.

In this mode, you may feel a slight re-

duction in cooling efficiency. If you

want more cooling, select A/C ON or

FULL AUTO.

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

122

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:44:34 31SZ3660_125

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

This button controls the source of

the air going into the system. When

the indicator above this button is lit,

air from the car’s interior is sent

through the system again (Recircula-

tion mode). When the indicator is off,

air is brought in from outside the car

(Fresh Air mode).

You can, for example, manually put

the system in recirculation mode

when driving through an area of

smoke or fumes.

You can manually select the fan

speedbyturningthefancontroldial.

When you turn the dial clockwise,

the fan is taken out of automatic

mode and starts to run at its lowest

speed. Turning the dial fully

clockwise increases the fan’s speed,

which increases air flow.

Use the MODE button to select the

vents the air flows from. Some air

will flow from the side vents and the

dashboard corner vents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODE

button, the display shows the mode

selected. Press the button four times

to see all the modes.

Mode Button

Recirculation Button

Fan Control Dial

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

123

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL MMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:44:45 31SZ3660_126

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The main air flow is divided

between the dashboard vents and

the floor vents.

The main air flow is divided

between the floor vents and de-

froster vents at the base of the wind-

shield.

The main air flow comes

from the floor vents.

The main air flow comes

from the dashboard vents.

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

124

01/09/28 19:44:52 31SZ3660_127

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The button directs the main

air flow to the windshield for faster

defrosting. It also overrides any

MODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/C

turns on automatically and the

system selects Fresh Air mode. For

faster defrosting, manually set the

fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso

increase air flow to the windshield by

closing the side vents in the

dashboard.

When you turn off by

pressing the button again, the

system returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear window

defogger on and off (see page ).71

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Rear Window Defogger Button

125

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:45:01 31SZ3660_128

Main Menu

Table of Contents

○

−

●

−

The air flow from the rear vents can

be adjusted when the climate control

system is on.

(Upper position):

Air flows from the upper vents in the

back of the center console.

(Lower position):

Air flows from the lower vents.

(Upper position): Maximum

(Center position): Moderate

(Lower position): Off

(Center position):

Air flow is divided between the upper

vents and the lower vents in the back

of the center console.

You can adjust the direction of the

air coming from the upper vents in

the center console by moving the tab

in the center of each vent up-and-

down and side-to-side.

You can also adjust the amount of

the air flow by sliding the air flow

control lever under the upper vents.

Slide this lever upward to increase

the amount of air flow.

Use the mode control lever to select

the air flow level. Air flows into the

rear seat at three levels.

Rear Ventilation

Mode Control Lever

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

126

MMOODDEE

CCOONNTTRROOLL

LLEEVVEERR

LLOOWWEERR

VVEENNTTSS

AAIIRR FFLLOOWW

CCOONNTTRROOLL

LLEEVVEERR

UUPPPPEERR

VVEENNTTSS

01/09/28 19:45:14 31SZ3660_129

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo

sensors. A sunlight sensor is located

in the top of the dashboard and a

temperature sensor is next to the

steering column. Do not cover the

sensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/Temperature

Sensor

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features

127

SSUUNNLLIIGGHHTT SSEENNSSOORR

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE SSEENNSSOORR

01/09/28 19:45:21 31SZ3660_130

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊

Your Acura’s audio system provides

clear reception on both AM and FM

bands, while the preset buttons allow

you to easily select your favorite

stations.

The cassette system features Dolby

noise reduction, automatic sensing of

chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and

auto-reverse for continuous play.

The anti-theft feature will disable the

system if it is disconnected from the

car’s battery. To get the system

working again, you must enter a

code number (see page ).156

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-

ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

AM/FM/Cassette Stereo Audio

System

3.5 RL without Navigation System

3.5 RL with Navigation System

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

128

01/09/28 19:45:31 31SZ3660_131

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

−＋＋

−

You can use any of three methods to

find radio stations on the selected

band: TUNE, SEEK, or the Preset

buttons.

Use the TUNE knob to

tune the radio to a desired frequency.

Turn the TUNE knob to the right to

tune to a higher frequency, or to the

left to tune to a lower frequency.

Turn the knob right or left until the

display reaches the desired

frequency.

You can store the

frequencies of your favorite radio

stations in the six preset buttons.

Each button will store one frequency

on the AM band, and two

frequencies on the FM band.

The SEEK function

searches the band for a station with

a strong signal. To activate it, push ei-

ther side of the SEEK/SKIP buttons

( or ). Push the button to

scan up from the current frequency,

andthe buttontoscandown.It

stops when it finds a station with a

strong signal.

The band and frequency that the ra-

dio was last tuned to is displayed. To

change bands, press the AM/FM but-

ton. On the FM band, ST will be dis-

played if the station is broadcasting

in stereo. ST will flash if you are driv-

inginanareawheretheradiosignal

is weak. Stereo reproduction on AM

is not available.

The ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to

operate the audio system. Turn the

system on by pushing the PWR/

VOL knob or the AM/FM button.

Adjust the volume by turning the

knob.

CONTINUED

TUNE

Preset

SEEK

Operating the Radio

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

3.5 RL without Navigation System

129

01/09/28 19:45:42 31SZ3660_132

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM or

FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store

two frequencies with each Preset

button.

Use the TUNE or SEEK function

to tune the radio to a desired

station.

Pick the Preset button you want

for that station. Press the button

and hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total

of six stations on AM and twelve

on FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,

simply press and release the proper

Preset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost if

your car’s battery goes dead, is

disconnected, or the radio fuse is

removed.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

130

PPWWRR//VVOOLL

KKNNOOBB

AAMM//FFMM

BBUUTTTTOONN

SSTTEERREEOO

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTUUNNEE

KKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP

BBUUTTTTOONNSS

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/09/28 19:45:52 31SZ3660_133

Main Menu

Table of Contents

− If you are

traveling far from home and can no

longer receive the stations you

preset, you can use the Auto Select

feature to find stations in the local

area.

To activate Auto Select, press the

A. SELECT button. A. SELECT will

appear in the display, and the system

will go into scan mode for several

seconds. It automatically scans both

bands, looking for stations with

strong signals. It stores the frequen-

cies of six AM stations and twelve

FM stations in the preset buttons.

You can then use the preset buttons

to select those stations.

If you are in a remote area, Auto

Select may not find six strong AM

stations or twelve strong FM stations.

If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’

displayed when you press any preset

button that does not have a station

stored.

With Auto Select on, you cannot

manually store any frequencies in

the preset buttons. If you do not like

the stations found by Auto Select,

you can use the TUNE and SEEK

functions to find other stations.

Auto Select does not erase the

frequencies that you preset pre-

viously. When you return home, turn

off Auto Select by pressing the

A. SELECT button. The preset

buttons will then select the fre-

quencies you originally set.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

131

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

TTUUNNEE

KKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP

BBUUTTTTOONNSS

01/09/28 19:46:00 31SZ3660_134

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

These two

controls adjust the strength of the

sound coming from each speaker.

The Balance control adjusts the side-

to-side strength, while the Fader

control adjusts the front-to-back

strength.

To adjust the fader, push on the

BASS/FADER control knob to get it

to pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,

and adjust the front-to-back sound to

your liking. Push the knob back in

when you are done so you cannot

change the setting by accidentally

bumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on the

TREBLE/BALANCE control knob

to get it to pop out. Pull it out slightly

farther, and adjust the side-to-side

sound to your liking. Push the knob

back in when you are done so you

cannot change the setting by

accidentally bumping it.

Use these controls

to adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push on

the TREBLE/BALANCE control

knob to get it to pop out. Without

pulling it out farther, turn the knob

to adjust the treble level. Push the

knob back in when you are done so

you cannot change the setting by

accidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on the

BASS/FADER control knob to get it

to pop out. Without pulling it out

farther, turn the knob to adjust the

bass level. Push the knob back in

when you are done so you cannot

change the setting by accidentally

bumping it.

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

132

BBAASSSS//FFAADDEERR

CCOONNTTRROOLL

TTRREEBBLLEE//BBAALLAANNCCEE

CCOONNTTRROOLL

01/09/28 19:46:10 31SZ3660_135

Main Menu

Table of Contents

▲

When the system reaches the end of

the tape, it will automatically reverse

direction and play the other side. If

you want to remove the cassette

from the drive, press the EJECT

button.

If you turn the system off while a

tape is playing, either with the PWR/

VOL knob or by turning off the

ignition, the cassette will remain in

the drive. When you turn the system

back on, the tape will begin playing

where it left off.

To switch to the radio or CD

changer while listening to a tape,

press the AM/FM or CD/TAPE but-

ton. To change back to the cassette

player, press the CD/TAPE button.

Make sure the tape opening on the

cassette is facing to the right, then

insert the cassette most of the way

into the slot. The system will pull it

in the rest of the way, and begin to

play.

The ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

The tape direction indicator will light

to show you which side of the

cassette is playing. The indicates

thesideyouinsertedfacingupward

is now playing. If you want to play

the other side, press the PROG/

PLAY button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on when

you insert a cassette. If the tape was

not recorded with Dolby noise reduc-

tion, turn it off by pressing the

button.

You can use the instrument panel

brightness control dial to adjust the il-

lumination of the audio system (see

page ). The audio system

illuminates when the parking lights

are on, even if the radio is turned off.

For information, See page .

141

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the Cassette PlayerAudio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies and Reception

133

01/09/28 19:46:23 31SZ3660_136

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

With a cassette playing, you can use

the FF, REW, TMS, or REPEAT

function to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-

wind move the tape rapidly. To re-

wind the tape, push the REW button.

You will see REW in the display. To

fast forward the tape, push the FF

button. You will see FF displayed.

Press the PROG/PLAY button to

take the system out of rewind or fast

forward. When the system reaches

the end of the tape, it reverses

direction and begins to play if in fast

forward, or it begins to play if in

rewind.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

134

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

TTMMSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

EEJJEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATT

BBUUTTTTOONN

TTMMSS

BBUUTTTTOONN

DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAASSTT FFOORRWWAARRDD

BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWWIINNDD

BBUUTTTTOONN

PPRROOGG//PPLLAAYY

BBUUTTTTOONN

TTAAPPEE

DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

01/09/28 19:46:32 31SZ3660_137

Main Menu

Table of Contents

− TheTapeMusicSearch

Function allows you to find the begin-

ning of a song or passage. To acti-

vate TMS, press the TMS button.

You will see TMS displayed. To find

the beginning of the song or passage

currently playing, push the REW but-

ton. You will see REW flashing in the

display as the tape rewinds. To find

the beginning of the next song, push

the FF button. You will see FF

flashing in the display as the tape

fast forwards. When the system

finds the beginning of a song or pas-

sage, it goes back to PLAY mode.

Press the TMS button again to turn

it off.

CONTINUED

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

TMS

135

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

TTAAPPEE

DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEWWIINNDD

BBUUTTTTOONN

EEJJEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEPPEEAATT

BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAASSTT FFOORRWWAARRDD

BBUUTTTTOONN

CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT

TTMMSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTMMSS BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:46:40 31SZ3660_138

Main Menu

Table of Contents

− The Repeat function

continuously replays the current

song or passage. Press the REPEAT

button to activate it; you will see RPT

displayed as a reminder. When the

system reaches the end of the song

or passage currently playing, it will

automatically go into rewind.

When it senses the beginning of the

same song or passage, the system

returns to PLAY mode. It will

continue to repeat this same

program until you deactivate

REPEAT by pressing the button

again.

The TMS and REPEAT functions

use silent periods on the tape to find

the end of a song or passage. These

features may not work to your

satisfaction if there is almost no gap

between selections, a high noise

level between selections, or a silent

period in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam inside

the drive or cause other problems.

See page for information on

cassette care and protection.

A Compact Disc changer is standard

equipment. It holds up to six discs,

providing several hours of continu-

ous entertainment. You operate the

CD changer with the same controls

used for the radio and cassette

player.

To load the CDs in the magazine and

load the magazine into the CD

changer, refer to page . Play only

standard round discs. Odd-shaped

CDs may jam in the drive or cause

other problems.

SelecttheCDmodebypressingthe

CD/TAPE button. You will see ‘‘CD’’

in the display. The system will start

to play the first track of the first disc

in the magazine. You will see the

disc and track number displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc in

the magazine is loaded and played.

After the last disc finishes, the

system returns to disc 1.

To operate the CD changer, the igni-

tion switch must be in ACCESSORY

(I) or ON (II).

Do not play discs with disc

accessories such as protective seals

or rubbers. Using them may also

cause the audio system to

malfunction.

159

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

149

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

SSEEEEKK BBAARR

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:48:59 31SZ3660_152

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

−＋

＋

−

−＋

This feature,

when activated, plays the tracks on a

CD in random order, rather than in

the order they are recorded on the

CD. To activate Random Play, press

the A. SELECT button. You will see

A. SELECT in the display. The sys-

tem will then select and play tracks

randomly on the current disc. When

all tracks on that disc have been

played, the next disc is loaded and

played randomly. This continues un-

til you deactivate Random Play by

pressing A. SELECT again.

To take the system out of CD mode,

press the AM/FM button or insert a

cassette in the player. If a tape is

already in the cassette player, press

the CD/TAPE button. When you

return to CD mode, play will contin-

ue at the same point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CD

is playing, either with the PWR/VOL

knob or the ignition switch, play will

continue at the same point when you

turn it back on.

To select a different disc, press the

appropriate preset button (1 6). If

you select an empty slot in the

magazine, the changer will, after

finding that slot empty, try to load

the CD in the next slot. This

continues until it finds a CD to load

and play.

You can use the SEEK bar to select

tracks within a disc. If you push and

release either side of the SEEK bar

( or ), the system will move to

the beginning of a track. Push the

button to move to the beginning of

the next track, and push the but-

ton to move to the beginning of the

current track.

When you activate the

Repeat feature by pressing the

REPEAT button, the system

continuously replays the current

track. You will see REPEAT in the

display as a reminder. Press the

REPEAT button again to turn it off.

For information on how to handle

and protect compact discs, see page

If you push and hold the SEEK bar

( or ), you will hear a beep and

the system will continue to move

across tracks. Release the button

when you think it has reached the

desired place on the disc.

153

RANDOM PLAY

REPEAT

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

150

01/09/28 19:49:08 31SZ3660_153

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Slide the lid to open the CD

changer.

The CD changer is located in the

trunk on the driver’s side.

Push the EJECT button to remove

the CD magazine. The magazine

will pop up automatically.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Loading the CD Changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

151

SSlliiddee

EEJJEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD CCHHAANNGGEERR

01/09/28 19:49:18 31SZ3660_154

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Put a CD on a tray with the printed

surface up as shown.

Reinstall the tray in the magazine.

Repeat this procedure for the oth-

er five trays.

Storeallsixtraysinthemagazine,

and then reinstall the magazine in

the CD changer as shown in the il-

lustration.

ToinstallaCD,pullthetaboutto

remove the tray from the maga-

zine.

Slide the lid closed until it clicks.

3. 4.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

152

TTAABB

TTRRAAYY

01/09/28 19:49:27 31SZ3660_155

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.

AnewCDmayberoughonthe

inner and outer edges. The small

plastic pieces causing this roughness

can flake off and fall on the re-

cording surface of the disc, causing

skipping or other problems. Remove

these pieces by rubbing the inner

and outer edges with the side of a

pencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.

Wipe across the disc from the center

to the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, store

it in its case to protect it from dust

and other contamination. To prevent

warpage, keep CDs out of direct

sunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; never

touch either surface. Contamination

from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip

pens, and labels can cause the CD to

not play properly, or possibly jam in

the drive.

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

153

01/09/28 19:49:36 31SZ3660_156

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you see an error indication in the

display while operating the CD

changer, find the cause in the chart

to the right. If you cannot clear the

error indication, take the car to your

Acura dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

Disc-changer

malfunction.

High temperature.

Misconnection or

disconnection of CD

changer.

No CD magazine in the

CD changer.

No CD in magazine.

Press the magazine eject button. If the

magazine does not eject, consult your Acura

dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns to

normal.

See your Acura dealer.

Insert a CD magazine.

Insert a CD in the magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

154

01/09/28 19:49:46 31SZ3660_157

Main Menu

Table of Contents

▲▼

Two controls for the audio system

are mounted in the steering wheel

hub. These let you control basic

functions without removing your

hand from the wheel.

The top and bottom buttons adjust

thevolumeup( )ordown( ).

Press the proper button and hold it

until the desired volume is reached,

then release it.

The AUDIO/CH button has three

functions, depending on whether you

are listening to the radio, or playing a

cassette or CD.

If you are listening to the radio, use

the AUDIO/CH button to change

stations. Each time you press this

button, the system advances to the

next preset station on the band you

are listening to. You will see the

number of the selected Preset button

in the display. To change bands,

press the AM/FM button on the

audio system’s front panel.

If you are playing a cassette, use the

AUDIO/CH button to advance to the

next selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’

blinking in the display when you

press the AUDIO/CH button. The

system fast forwards until it senses a

silent period, then goes back to

PLAY.

IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem

skips to the beginning of the next

track each time you push the

AUDIO/CH button. You will see the

disc and track number in the display.

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

155

AAUUDDIIOO//CCHH

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:49:56 31SZ3660_158

Main Menu

Table of Contents

You will have to store your favorite

stations in the Preset buttons after

the system begins working. Your

original settings were lost when

power was disconnected.

Your car’s audio system will disable

itself if it is disconnected from

electrical power for any reason. To

make it work again, the user must

enter a specific five-digit code in the

Preset buttons. Because there are

hundreds of number combinations

possible from five digits, making the

system work without knowing the

exact code is nearly impossible.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, or the radio fuse is

removed, the audio system will

disable itself. If this happens, you

will see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequency

display the next time you turn on the

system. Use the Preset buttons to

enter the five-digit code. If it is

entered correctly, the radio will start

playing.

Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat

lists your audio system’s code

number and serial number. It is best

tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat

home. In addition, you should write

the audio system’s serial number in

this Owner’s Manual. If you should

happen to lose the card, you must

obtain the code number from your

Acura dealer. To do this, you will

need the system’s serial number.

If you make a mistake entering the

code, do not start over or try to

correct your mistake. Complete the

five-digit sequence, then enter the

correct code. You have three tries to

enter the correct code. If you are

unsuccessful in three attempts, you

must then leave the system on for

one hour before trying again.

Theft Protection

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

156

01/09/28 19:50:03 31SZ3660_159

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Once the security system is set,

opening any door (without using the

key or the remote transmitter), or

the hood, will cause it to alarm. It

also alarms if the radio is removed

from the dashboard or the wiring is

cut.

With the system set, you can still

open the trunk with the master key

or the remote transmitter without

triggering the alarm. The alarm will

sound if the trunk lock is forced, or

the trunk is opened with the trunk

releasebuttononthedriver’sdoor.

The security system will not set if

the hood, trunk, or any door is not

fully closed. If the system will not set,

check the Door and Brake Lamp

Monitor on the instrument panel

(see page ), to see if the doors

and trunk are fully closed. Since it is

notpartofthemonitordisplay,

manually check the hood.

The security system sets auto-

matically fifteen seconds after you

lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For

the system to activate, you must lock

the doors from the outside with the

key, lock tab, door lock switch, or

remote transmitter. The security

system light next to the driver’s door

lock starts blinking immediately to

show you the system is setting itself.

Do not attempt to alter this system

or add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protect

your car and valuables from theft.

The horn sounds and a combination

of headlights, parking lights, side

marker lights and taillights flashes if

someone attempts to break into your

carorremovetheradio.Thisalarm

continues for two minutes, then the

system resets. To reset an alarming

system before the two minutes have

elapsed, unlock either front door

with the key or the remote

transmitter.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Security System

157

SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 19:50:11 31SZ3660_160

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Push in the Cruise Control Master

Switch to the left of the steering

column. The indicator in the

switch will light.

Accelerate to the desired cruising

speedabove25mph(40km/h).

Cruise control allows you to maintain

asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)

without keeping your foot on the

accelerator pedal. It should be used

for cruising on straight, open

highways. It is not recommended for

conditions such as city driving,

winding roads, slippery roads, heavy

rain, or bad weather. You should

have full control of the car under

those conditions.

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

158

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

Improper use of the cruise

control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only

when traveling on open

highways in good weather.

01/09/28 19:50:20 31SZ3660_161

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Press and release the SET/decel

buttononthesteeringwheel.The

CRUISE CONTROL light on the

instrument panel comes on to

show the system is now activated.

Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe

set speed when you are going up and

down hills. If your speed increases

going down a hill, use the brakes to

slow down to the desired speed. This

will cancel the cruise control. To

resume the set speed, press the

RESUME/accel button. The

CRUISE CONTROL light on the

instrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, the

automatic transmission may

downshift to hold the set speed.

You can increase the set cruising

speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/

accel button. The car will acceler-

ate. When you reach the desired

cruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-

celerate to the desired cruising

speed and press the SET/decel

button.

To increase your speed in very

small amounts, tap the RESUME/

accel button repeatedly. Each time

you do this, your car will speed up

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

159

SSEETT//ddeecceell

BBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSUUMMEE//

aacccceell

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:50:30 31SZ3660_162

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin

any of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control Master

Switch.

You can decrease the set cruising

speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decel

button. The car will decelerate.

Release the button when you

reach the desired speed.

Tap the brake pedal lightly with

your foot. The CRUISE

CONTROL light on the

instrument panel will go out.

When the car slows to the desired

speed, press the SET/decel button.

The car will then maintain the

desired speed.

To slow down in very small

amounts, tap the SET/decel

button repeatedly. Each time you

do this, your car will slow down

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Even with the cruise control turned

on, you can still use the accelerator

pedal to speed up for passing. After

completing the pass, take your foot

off the accelerator pedal. The car

will return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal

will cause the cruise control to

cancel.

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

160

CCAANNCCEELL

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:50:42 31SZ3660_163

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Pressing the Cruise Control Master

Switch turns the system completely

off and erases the previous cruising

speed from memory. To use the

system again, refer to

When you push the CANCEL button,

or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE

CONTROL light on the instrument

panel will go out and the car will

begin to slow down. You can use the

accelerator pedal in the normal way.

The system remembers the

previously-set cruising speed. To

return to that speed, accelerate to

above25mph(40km/h),thenpress

and release the RESUME/accel

button. The CRUISE CONTROL

light comes on, and the car will

accelerate to the same cruising

speed as before.

Using the

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

161

01/09/28 19:50:47 31SZ3660_164

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The HomeLink Universal

Transceiver built into your car can

be programmed to operate remotely-

controlled devices around your home,

such as garage doors, lighting, or

home security systems. It can

replaceuptothreeremote

transmitters.

If you have problems with training

the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,

or would like information on home

products that can be operated by the

transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On

the Internet, go to www.homelink.

com.

Always refer to the operating

instructions and safety information

that came with your garage door

opener or other equipment you

intend to operate with the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver. If you do not

have this information, you should

contact the manufacturer of the

equipment.

While training or using HomeLink,

make sure you have a clear view of

the garage door or gate, and that no

one will be injured by its movement.

If you are training HomeLink to

operate a garage door or gate, it is

recommended that you unplug the

motor for that device during

training. Repeatedly pressing the

remote control button could burn

out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in a

permanent memory. There should

be no need to retrain HomeLink if

your car’s battery goes dead or is

disconnected.

If your garage door opener was

manufactured before April 1982, you

may not be able to program

HomeLink to operate it. Garage door

openers manufactured before that

date do not have a safety feature that

causes them to stop and reverse if an

obstacle is detected during closing,

increasing the risk of injury. If you

have questions, call (800) 355-3515.

Customer Assistance

Important Safety Precautions General Information

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

162

01/09/28 19:50:57 31SZ3660_165

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

If you are training the second or

third buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door opener

motor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink to

operate devices around your home, it

must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For

example, to train HomeLink to open

and close the garage door:

If you just took

delivery of your vehicle and have not

trained any of the buttons in

HomeLink before, you should erase

any previously learned codes before

training the first button. To do this,

press and hold the two outside

buttons on the HomeLink

transceiver for about 20 seconds,

until the red light flashes. Release

the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Holdtheendofthegaragedoor

opener remote control 2 to 5

inches from HomeLink. Make

sure you are not blocking your

view of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button you

want to train.

Press the button on the remote

control and the button on

HomeLink at the same time. Hold

down both buttons.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLink

Before you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

163

01/09/28 19:51:08 31SZ3660_166

Main Menu

Table of Contents

For security purposes, newer garage

door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’

or variable code. Information from

the remote control and the garage

door opener are needed before

HomeLink can operate the garage

door opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’

procedure trains HomeLink to the

proper garage door opener code.

The following procedure

synchronizes HomeLink to the

garage door opener so they send and

receive the correct codes.

The remote control you are training

from may stop transmitting after two

seconds. This is not long enough for

HomeLink to learn the code. Release

and press the button on the remote

control every two seconds until

HomeLink has learned the code.

The red light in HomeLink should

begin flashing. It will flash slowly

at first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,

release both buttons. HomeLink

should have learned the code from

the remote control.

Plug in the garage door opener

motor, then test the HomeLink

transceiver button by pushing it. It

should operate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeat

this procedure to train it again. If it

still does not work, you may have a

variable or rolling code garage

door opener. Test this by pressing

and holding the HomeLink

transceiver button you just trained.

If the red light blinks for two

seconds,thenstayson,youhavea

rolling code garage door opener.

You may be able to verify this with

the manufacturer’s documentation.

Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling

Code System.’’

Repeat these steps to train the

other two HomeLink buttons to

operate any other remotely-

controlled devices around your

home (lighting, automatic gate,

security system, etc.).

Canadian Owners:

Training With a Rolling Code

System

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

164

01/09/28 19:51:19 31SZ3660_167

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Itmaybehelpfultohavesomeone

assist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your

garage door opener unit. The

location will vary, depending on

the manufacturer. The

manufacturer’s documentation

may help.

Press the Training button on the

garage door opener unit until the

light next to the button comes on,

then release it. The light may blink,

or come on and stay on. You then

have approximately 30 seconds to

complete the following steps.

Make sure you have properly

completed the ‘‘Training

HomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button on

HomeLink for 3 4 seconds.

(The same button you trained with

the ‘‘Training HomeLink’’

procedure.)

Press and hold the HomeLink

button again for 3 4 seconds.

This should turn off the training

light on the garage door opener

unit. (Some systems may require

youtopressthebuttonuptothree

times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.

It should operate the garage door.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

165

TTRRAAIINNIINNGG

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:51:29 31SZ3660_168

Main Menu

Table of Contents

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree

buttons, press and hold the two

outside buttons until the red light

begins to flash, then release the

buttons.

Youshoulderaseallthreecodes

before selling the car.

Totrainanalreadyprogrammed

HomeLink button to operate a new

device:

Select the HomeLink button you

want to train.

Press and hold the HomeLink

button until the red light begins to

flash slowly (approximately 20

seconds).

While continuing to hold the

HomeLink button, place the

remotecontrolforthedevice2to

5inchesfromHomeLink.

Press and hold the button on the

remote control. Hold both buttons

until the red light begins to flash

rapidly.

Release both buttons. HomeLink

should now be trained to operate

the device.

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

166

01/09/28 19:51:42 31SZ3660_169

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The OnStar system in your vehicle

gives you immediate access to a wide

range of services and information

with the touch of a button. An

OnStar advisor is available 24 hours

a day, 7 days a week.

The basic Safety & Security Plan

provides:

Press this button to contact an

OnStar advisor. You will hear a

chime, followed by the

announcement, ‘‘Connecting to

OnStar.’’ The connection should take

20 to 30 seconds. The advisor will

assist you with any of the services

included in your plan.

Depending on what service you

request, you may need to give your

Personal Identification Number

(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is a

number you make up and provide

when you establish your OnStar

service.

If cellular telephone service is not

available in the area you are driving

in, you will hear a fast busy signal.

The system will retry the connection

several times before returning to the

ready mode.

Roadside Assistance.

Emergency Services.

Automatic Notification of Airbag

Deployment.

Accident Assist.

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking.

Stolen Vehicle Tracking.

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance.

The Premium Service Plan provides

these additional features:

Route Support.

Ride Assist.

Information and Convenience

Services.

Concierge Services.

The OnStar control buttons and

indicator are located in the base of

the rear view mirror.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

OnStar System

OnStar Services ButtonOnStar Control Panel

167

OOnnSSttaarr BBUUTTTTOONN

SSYYSSTTEEMM

SSTTAATTUUSS LLIIGGHHTT

EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

BBUUTTTTOONN

CCAALLLL

AANNSSWWEERR//EENNDD

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/09/28 19:52:02 31SZ3660_170

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

To cancel these retries, press the

Call Answer/End (DOT) button.

A microphone is located in the base

oftherearviewmirrorsoyoucan

speak to the advisor without taking

your hands off the steering wheel or

diverting your attention from the

road. The OnStar advisor’s voice

comes from the audio system’s

speakers. Use the volume control on

the audio system or on the steering

wheel to adjust the volume.

Press this button to contact an

OnStar advisor only if you have an

emergency situation. You will hear a

tone, followed by the announcement,

‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’

Your call is given highest priority.

The advisor will ask about the nature

of the emergency, locate your

vehicle, and notify the appropriate

emergency service agencies.

Press this ‘‘DOT’’ button to end a call

to the OnStar advisor, or to cancel

the call if you should press one of

the other buttons accidentally. If the

OnStar center should call you, press

this button to answer the call.

This button is also used to initiate

the Personal Calling and Virtual

Advisor services, if you have

subscribed.

This light shows you the status of

the system.

The system is ready

for use.

Acallisin

progress.

There is a problem in

the system. Press the OnStar button

to contact an advisor. If the call

connects, the advisor will assist you

with verifying the system’s operation.

If you are not able to contact an

advisor, take your vehicle to an

Acura dealer to have the system

diagnosed.

There is a problem

in the system with a call in progress.

If you press this button accidentally,

do not cancel the call. Wait until the

OnStar advisor answers, then explain

your mistake.

Emergency Button

Call Answer/End Button

Solid Green

Blinking Green

Solid Red

Blinking Red

System Status Light

OnStar System

Comfort and Convenience Features

168

01/09/28 19:52:17 31SZ3660_171

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

The OnStar system uses the Global

Positioning System (GPS) to locate

your vehicle whenever you place a

call. This allows the advisor to

quickly contact the nearest services

without requiring you to provide

detailed directions.

Contact

the OnStar advisor if you need

assistance with a problem (flat tire,

out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. The

advisor will contact an appropriate

agency to come and assist you.

Contact an

OnStar advisor if you have an

emergency situation. The advisor

will contact the nearest emergency

services provider (ambulance, fire

department, etc.) and advise them of

your situation.

If you are ever in an

accident that causes the airbags to

deploy, the OnStar system

automatically places a call (provided

the OnStar system and your vehicle’s

electrical system are still intact). The

advisor will attempt to speak to you

to evaluate the situation, and contact

the nearest emergency services

provider.

The OnStar

advisor can help you if you are ever

in a minor accident by giving you a

list of information you should collect

at the accident scene.Complete,

detailed information will make it

easier to complete accident reports

and insurance claims.

By sending a signal to your

vehicle, the advisor can lock or

unlock your vehicle’s doors. This is

helpfulifyouareawayfromyour

vehicle and realize you forgot to lock

the doors, or if you have locked the

keys in your vehicle. To get OnStar’s

assistance, call (888) 4-ONSTAR

(466-7827).

Using

GPS, OnStar can locate your vehicle

almost anywhere. If your vehicle is

ever stolen, contact OnStar at (888)

4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put you

in contact with the proper authorities,

and assist them with locating your

vehicle.

If you are unable to locate your

vehicleinalargeparkinglotor

parking structure, contact OnStar at

(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will

remotely activate the exterior lights

and the horn, allowing you to locate

your vehicle.

Comfort and Convenience Features

OnStar System

Safety and Security Plan Features

Roadside Assistance

Emergency Services

Automatic Notification of Airbag

Deployment

Accident Assist

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking

Stolen Vehicle Tracking

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance

169

01/09/28 19:52:28 31SZ3660_172

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

The Premium Service Plan provides

these additional features.

The OnStar

advisor can give you verbal

directions from your current location

to a desired destination.

If you need a ride

(taxi, limousine service, etc.) the

OnStar advisor can make the

arrangements for you. Use the

OnStar button or call (888)

4-ONSTAR.

The OnStar advisor can

give you information on nearby

hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,

gas stations, and many other

services in any area you are traveling

in. The advisor can also help you

with hotel or restaurant reservations.

The OnStar

advisor can assist you with

purchasing theater tickets, airline

tickets, rental car reservations for a

vacation, and just about any other

purchase you desire.

The OnStar Personal Calling plan is

an extra-cost option that gives you

the ability to use your vehicle’s

OnStar system as a hands-free

cellular telephone.

To sign up for Personal Calling,

press the OnStar button in your

vehicle, and notify the advisor that

you’d like to sign up. The advisor will

get all the information needed to set

up your account, and provide you

with your new cellular telephone

number.

You will need to provide a credit card

number, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ or

minutes of air time (one unit equals

one minute).

You

must use voice commands to give

the OnStar system your calling

information. To make a phone call:

Press the Call Answer/End

(DOT) Button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Dial.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Number

Please.’’

Say the first digit of the number.

OnStar will repeat that digit.

Always wait for OnStar to confirm

the digit before going to the next

digit.

Say the second digit of the number.

OnStar will repeat that digit.

Premium Service Plan Features

Route Support

Ride Assist

Information and Convenience

Services

Concierge Services

Personal Calling

Placing a Telephone Call

OnStar System

Comfort and Convenience Features

170

01/09/28 19:52:45 31SZ3660_173

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Continue this until you have given

OnStar the complete telephone

number. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’

If the system has difficulty

understanding a voice command, it

canrespondwith:

‘‘Pardon’’ The system could not

match your voice command to one it

knows. Repeat the command

distinctly.

‘‘Slower please’’ The system

missed the command because it was

not yet ready for it, or there was too

much background noise. Repeat the

command after a short pause.

With

voice feedback off, the system will

respond with a tone rather than

‘‘Ready,’’ or repeating each number

you say. Other responses will still be

by voice. To turn voice feedback on

or off:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’

andthenrepeatthecomplete

telephone number. It will then

place the telephone call.

When you have finished your

conversation, press the DOT

button again to hang up.

If you make a mistake speaking a

digit of the phone number, or the

system responds with the wrong

digit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the

system to erase the last digit.

If you need to cancel the phone call

attempt before entering the

complete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’

The system will cancel the operation

and return to Ready.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Voice Feedback.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Voice

feedback On/Off.’’

When someone places a telephone

call to you, the audio system will

mute and you will hear the ring.

Press the DOT button to answer the

call. When you have completed the

call, press the DOT button again to

hang up.

The OnStar system can store up to

twenty 32-digit telephone numbers in

its memory. When you store these

numbers in its memory, you give

each one a nametag. When you want

to place a telephone call, you can

recall the number by giving the

system the nametag.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

OnStar System

Voice Feedback On/Off

Incoming Telephone Calls

Using Nametags

171

01/09/28 19:52:59 31SZ3660_174

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

＜＞

−

To store a

telephone number and its nametag in

the system:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Store.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Number

Please.’’

Say the first digit of the number.

OnStar will repeat that digit.

Say the second digit of the number.

OnStar will repeat that digit.

Continue this until you have given

OnStar the complete telephone

number. Then say ‘‘Store’’ again.

OnStar will respond with

‘‘Nametag Please.’’

Say the name that you want

assigned to that telephone number.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Again.’’

Repeat the nametag.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Once

more.’’

Repeat the nametag.

place a telephone call using a

nametag:

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storing

nametag .’’

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Call.’’

OnStar will respond with

‘‘Nametag Please.’’

Say the nametag for the number

you want to call.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling

nametag ,’’ then place the

telephone call.

If you have forgotten what nametags

you have stored, the system will read

them to you. Press the DOT button.

When the system responds with

‘‘Ready,’’ say ‘‘Directory.’’

To delete a

nametag and telephone number from

memory:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Delete.’’

OnStar will respond with

‘‘Nametag Please.’’

Storing a Nametag

Placing a Telephone Call

Deleting a Nametag

OnStar System

Comfort and Convenience Features

172

01/09/28 19:53:24 31SZ3660_175

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＜＞

−

＜＞

Say the nametag for the number

you want to delete.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete

nametag , Yes or No.’’

Say ‘‘Yes.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting

nametag .’’

To redial

the last telephone number you

called:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Redial.’’

OnStar will respond with

‘‘Redialing,’’ then place the

telephone call.

By giving the system a security code

that you make up, you can lock out

the Personal Calling and Virtual

Advisor capabilities of the system so

unauthorized people cannot make

telephone calls. To turn security on

or off:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Security.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Enter

four-digit security code.’’

Say the first digit of the code.

OnStar will repeat that digit.

Say the second digit of the code.

Say the third digit of the code.

OnStar will repeat that digit.

Say the fourth digit of the code.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Security

code number is now ON/OFF.’’

You must prepurchase units

(minutes) of cellular air time. The

OnStar system tracks how many

units you have remaining.

To find out how many units you have

remaining:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Units.’’

If you forget the security code

entered, or someone else enters a

security code unknown to you, you

must contact an OnStar advisor to

reset the code. Press the OnStar

button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features

OnStar System

Redialing a Number

Security Code

Keeping Track of Units

173

01/09/28 19:53:49 31SZ3660_176

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＜＞

−

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify

or add.’’

Say ‘‘Verify.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘You

have number units remaining.’’

To purchase more

units of cellular air time:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Units.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify

or add.’’

Say ‘‘Add.’’

OnStar will connect you to an

advisor to handle your purchase.

For an additional fee, you can also

enjoy the benefits of Virtual Advisor.

This feature lets you hear

information in your vehicle about

weather, sports, news, and stocks. It

is even possible to have your e-mail

read to you.

Although Virtual Advisor can

provide information on many

subjects, you can set up a

customized profile with OnStar that

makes it easier to get information

about areas that are of specific

interest to you. To do this, you must

go to the OnStar web site, www.

onstar.com. This is a secure site; you

will need your account number and

PIN to access your account

information and to design your

customized profile.

If you do not have Internet access, a

default profile can be set up for you.

To use the Virtual Advisor from your

vehicle:

Press the DOT button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’

Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’

The system will connect you to the

Virtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisor

will prompt you for the information

you desire.

If you would like to hear a list of

voice commands that are available,

say ‘‘Help.’’ OnStar is continually

upgrading the system, and new

commands become available.

You can also call OnStar at (888) 4-

ONSTAR, or get information about

your account at the OnStar web site,

www.onstar.com.

Adding Units

OnStar Virtual Advisor

OnStar System

Comfort and Convenience Features

174

01/09/28 19:54:08 31SZ3660_177

Main Menu

Table of Contents

You make up and provide your

Personal Identification Number

(PIN) when you establish your

account with OnStar. You should

write down your PIN and keep it

with you at all times.

You can change your PIN at any time.

Contact the OnStar advisor by

pressing the OnStar button, or by

calling (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you forget your PIN, contact the

OnStar advisor. For security reasons,

your PIN will be mailed to you.

OnStar uses the Global Positioning

System (GPS) to locate your vehicle

for functions such as route guidance

and roadside assistance. GPS is

affected by structures that can

obstruct the signal, such as tunnels,

parking structures, and tall buildings.

It may not be possible for OnStar to

pinpoint your location if you are in or

near such structures.

OnStar uses cellular technology to

communicate with your vehicle.

Cellular coverage varies by location,

which may affect the ability to

establish a connection, or the quality

of the connection.

When you turn off your vehicle’s

ignition, the OnStar system goes into

low-power mode. After 48 hours, it

switches to sleep mode to conserve

your vehicle’s battery power.

Features such as remote door

unlocking and misplaced vehicle

assistance will not work after your

vehicle has been parked for more

that 48 hours.

Comfort and Convenience Features

OnStar System

Personal Identification Number System Limitations

175

01/09/28 19:54:19 31SZ3660_178

Main Menu

Table of Contents

176

01/09/28 19:54:21 31SZ3660_179

Main Menu

Before you begin driving your Acura,

youshouldknowwhatgasolineto

use, and how to check the levels of

important fluids. You also need to

know how to properly store luggage

or packages. The information in this

section will help you. If you plan to

add any accessories to your car,

please read the information in this

section first.

.............................Break-in Period . 178

.........................................Gasoline . 178

.........Service Station Procedures . 179

................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179

....................Opening the Hood . 180

...............................Oil Check . 181

.........Engine Coolant Check . 182

...............................Fuel Economy . 183

............................Car Condition . 183

...........................Driving Habits . 183

...Accessories and Modifications . 184

.............................Carrying Cargo . 186

Before Driving

177

01/09/28 19:54:26 31SZ3660_180

Main Menu

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid

acceleration.

If you are unable to find premium

unleaded gasoline, you may substi-

tute an unleaded regular gasoline.

The engine will compensate for the

lower octane, but you may notice a

slight decrease in power as a result.

We recommend gasolines containing

detergent additives that help prevent

fuel system and engine deposits.

Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes

need to be broken-in by moderate

use for the first 200 miles (300

km).

Your Acura is designed to operate on

premium unleaded gasoline with a

pump octane number of 91 or higher.

In Canada, some gasolines contain

an octane-enhancing additive called

MMT. If you use such gasolines,

your emissions control system

performance may deteriorate and

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on

your instrument panel may turn on.

If this happens, contact your

authorized Acura dealer for service.

Help assure your car’s future

reliability and performance by paying

extra attention to how you drive

during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Using gasoline containing lead will

damage your car’s emissions

controls. This contributes to air

pollution.

Do not change the oil until the

recommended time or mileage

intervalshowninthemaintenance

schedule.

Youshouldfollowthesesamere-

commendations with an overhauled

or exchanged engine, or when the

brakes are relined.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

178

01/09/28 19:54:38 31SZ3660_181

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Open the fuel fill door by pulling

onthehandletotheleftofthe

driver’s seat.

Removethefuelfillcapslowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as

pressure inside the tank escapes.

Place the cap in the holder on the

fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel

nozzle automatically clicks off. Do

not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave

some room for the fuel to expand

with temperature changes.

Because the fuel fill cap is on the

driver’s side of the car, park with

that side closest to the service

station pumps.

Your car has an on-board refueling

vapor recovery system to help

keep fuel vapors from going into

the atmosphere. If the fuel nozzle

keeps clicking off even though the

tank is not full, there may be a

problem with this system. Consult

your dealer.

CONTINUED

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

179

PPuullll

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

Gasoline is highly flammable

and explosive. You can be

burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keep

heat, sparks, and flame away.

Handle fuel only outdoors.

Wipe up spills immediately.

01/09/28 19:54:50 31SZ3660_182

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Standing in front of the car, reach

in between the hood and the front

bumper with your finger. Slide the

latch handle.

Shift to Park or Neutral and set

the parking brake. Pull the hood

release handle located under the

lower left corner of the dashboard.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,

tighten it until it clicks several

times. If you do not properly

tighten the cap, the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp may come on (see

page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches.

1. 2.

297

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood

180

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

LLAATTCCHH HHAANNDDLLEE

01/09/28 19:55:00 31SZ3660_183

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Wipe the dipstick with a clean

cloth or paper towel.

Check the engine oil level every time

you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a

few minutes after turning the engine

off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange

handle).

If you can open the hood without

sliding the hood latch handle, or the

hood latch handle moves stiffly or

does not spring back as before, the

mechanism should be cleaned and

lubricated (see page ).

Lift the hood up most of the way.

The hydraulic supports will lift it

uptherestofthewayandholdit

up.

To close the hood, lower it to about a

foot (30 cm) above the fender, then

press down firmly with your hands.

Afterclosingthehood,makesureit

is securely latched.

241

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Oil Check

181

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

01/09/28 19:55:12 31SZ3660_184

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Refer to

on page for information

on checking other items in your

Acura.

Look at the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is

between the MAX and MIN lines. If

it is below the MIN line, see

on page for

informationonaddingtheproper

coolant.

Remove the dipstick again and

check the level. It should be

between the upper and lower

marks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,

see on page .

Insert it all the way back in its tube. 4.3.

227

231

225

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Owner Maintenance

Checks

Adding

Engine Coolant

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

182

MMIINN

MMAAXX

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

01/09/28 19:55:22 31SZ3660_185

Main Menu

Table of Contents

A cold engine uses more fuel than a

warm engine. It is not necessary to

‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it

idle for a long time. You can drive

away in about a minute, no matter

how cold it is outside. The engine

will warm up faster, and you get

better fuel economy. To cut down on

the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to

combine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy by

driving moderately. Rapid acceler-

ation, abrupt cornering, and hard

braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear that

allows the engine to run and acceler-

ate smoothly.

An important part of that mainte-

nance is the

(see page ). For

example, an underinflated tire

causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’

which uses fuel. It also wears out

faster, so check the tire pressure at

least monthly.

The air conditioning puts an extra

load on the engine which makes it

usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cor

set the climate control to a higher

temperature to cut down on air

conditioning use. Use the flow-

through ventilation when the outside

air temperature is moderate.

The condition of your car and your

driving habits are the two most

important things that affect the fuel

mileage you get.

Always maintain your car according

to the maintenance schedule. This

will keep it in top operating condition.

In winter, the build-up of snow on

your car’s underside adds weight and

rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning

helps your fuel mileage and reduces

thechanceofcorrosion.

Depending on traffic conditions, try

to maintain a constant speed. Every

time you slow down and speed up,

your car uses extra fuel. Use the

cruise control, when appropriate, to

increase fuel economy.

225

Driving Habits

Owner Maintenance

Checks

Car Condition

Fuel Economy

Before Driving

183

01/09/28 19:55:34 31SZ3660_186

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Modifying your car, or installing

some non-Acura accessories, can

make your car unsafe. Before you

make any modifications or add any

accessories,besuretoreadthe

following information.

Your dealer has Genuine Acura

accessories that allow you to

personalize your car. These

accessories have been designed and

approved for your car, and are

covered by warranty.

Non-Acura accessories are usually

designed for universal applications.

Although aftermarket accessories

may fit on your car, they may not

meet factory specifications, and

could adversely affect your car’s

handling and stability. (See

‘‘Modifications’’ on page for

additional information.)

When properly installed, cellular

phones, alarms, two-way radios, and

low-powered audio systems should

not interfere with your car’s

computer-controlled systems, such

as the SRS and anti-lock brake

system.

If possible, have your dealer inspect

the final installation.

Have the installer contact your

Acura dealer for assistance before

installing any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories do

not overload electrical circuits

(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does not

obscure any lights, or interfere

with proper car operation or

performance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessories

are improperly installed, or exceed

your car’s electrical system capacity,

they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause the

airbags to deploy.

302

185

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

184

Improper accessories or

modifications can affect your

car’s handling, stability and

performance, and cause a

crash in which you can be hurt

or killed.

Follow all instructions in this

owner’s manual regarding

accessories and modifications.

01/10/11 11:46:25 31SZ3660_187

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Do not remove any original

equipment or modify your car in any

way that would alter its design or

operation. This could make your car

unsafe and illegal to drive.

Such modifications can adversely

affect handling, and interfere with

the operation of the car’s anti-lock

brakes and other systems.

Covering the outside edge of a

front seat-back, with a non-Acura

seat cover for example, could

prevent the airbag from inflating

properly.

For example, do not make any

modifications that would change the

ride height of your car, or install

wheels and tires with a different

overall diameter.

If a side airbag

inflates,acupholderorotherhard

object attached on or near the

door could be propelled inside the

car and hurt someone.

In addition, any modifications that

decrease ground clearance increase

the chance of undercarriage parts

striking a curb, speed bump, or other

raised object, which could cause

your airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheel

or any other part of your

Supplemental Restraint System.

Modifications could make the

system ineffective.

Any object

attached to or placed on the covers

marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the

center of the steering wheel and

on top of the dashboard, could

interfere with the proper operation

of the airbags. Or, if the airbags

inflate, the objects could be

propelled inside the car and hurt

someone.

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not place any objects over the

outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.

Do not attach hard objects on or

near a front door.

Do not attach or place objects on

the front airbag covers.

185

01/09/28 19:55:55 31SZ3660_188

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The glove box, and the pockets in

the front doors and seat-back, are

designed for small, lightweight items.

The trunk is intended for larger,

heavier items.

Your car has several convenient

storage areas so you can stow cargo

safely.

However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect

your car’s handling, stability, and

operation and make it unsafe. Before

carrying any type of cargo, be sure to

read the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

186

FFRROONNTT DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETTCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXXSSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETTTTRRUUNNKK

01/09/28 19:56:02 31SZ3660_189

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Store or secure all items that could

be thrown around and hurt

someone during a crash.

Besureitemsplacedonthefloor

behind the front seats cannot roll

under the seats and interfere with

the driver’s ability to operate the

pedals, or with the proper

operation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If the lid is open, a

passenger could injure their knees

during a crash or sudden stop.

The maximum load for your car is

850 lbs (395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of the

rear shelf. They can block your

viewandbethrownaroundthecar

during a crash.

The final number is the total weight

of cargo you can carry.

Subtract the total from 850 lbs

(395 kg).

If you are towing a trailer, add the

tongue weight to the number

above.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo you

can carry:

This figure includes the total weight

of all occupants, cargo, accessories,

and the tongue weight if you are

towing a trailer.

Carrying Items in the Passenger

Compartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

187

Overloading or improper

loading can affect handling and

stability and cause a crash in

which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this

manual.

01/09/28 19:56:15 31SZ3660_190

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you carry large items that

prevent you from closing the trunk

lid, exhaust gas can enter the

passenger area. To avoid the

possibility of carbon monoxide

poisoning, follow the instructions

on page .

Distribute cargo evenly on the

floor of the trunk, placing the

heaviest items on the bottom and

as far forward as possible.

If you can carry any items on a

roofrack,besurethetotalweight

of the rack and the items does not

exceed the maximum allowable

weight. Please contact your Acura

dealer for further information.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on

a Roof Rack

188

01/09/28 19:56:21 31SZ3660_191

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This section gives you tips on

starting the engine under various

conditions, and how to operate the

automatic transmission. It also

includes important information on

parking your car, the braking system,

the Vehicle Stability Assist System,

and facts you need if you are

planning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 190

.......................Starting the Engine . 191

Starting in Cold Weather

....................at High Altitude . 191

..............Automatic Transmission . 192

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 192

................Shift Lever Positions . 192

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 194

....................Shift Lock Release . 195

...........................................Parking . 196

.....................The Braking System . 197

.............Brake Wear Indicators . 197

...............Brake System Design . 198

.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 198

Important Safety

.........................Reminders . 199

........................ABS Indicator . 199

...Vehicle Stability Assist System . 201

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 204

...........................Towing a Trailer . 206

Driving

189

01/09/28 19:56:26 31SZ3660_192

Main Menu

Make sure all windows, mirrors,

and outside lights are clean and

unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,

or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk are

fully closed.

Check the adjustment of the

inside and outside mirrors (see

page ).

Check the adjustment of the

steering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securely

closed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check that

your passengers have fastened

their seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Check the indicator lights in the

instrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicator

lights in the instrument panel (see

page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tire

looks low, use a gauge to check its

pressure.

Check that any items you may be

carrying with you inside are stored

properly or fastened down

securely.

Youshoulddothefollowingchecks

and adjustments every day before

you drive your car.

Check the adjustment of the seat

(see page ).

10.

11.

12.

191

Preparing to Drive

Driving

190

01/09/28 19:56:40 31SZ3660_193

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Push the accelerator pedal half-

way to the floor and hold it there

while starting the engine. Do not

hold the ignition key in START

(III) for more than 15 seconds.

When the engine starts, release

the accelerator pedal gradually as

the engine speeds up and smooths

out.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,

push the accelerator pedal to the

floor and hold it there while you

try to start the engine for no more

than 15 seconds. If the engine

does not start, return to step 2.

If the engine still does not start,

press the accelerator pedal all the

way down and hold it there while

starting in order to clear flooding.

As before, keep the ignition key in

the START (III) position for no

more than 15 seconds. Return to

step 5 if the engine does not start.

If it starts, lift your foot off the

accelerator pedal so the engine

does not race.

An engine is harder to start in cold

weather. The thinner air found at

high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters) adds to the problem.

Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessories

to reduce the drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories to reduce

the drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is in

Park. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to the

START (III) position. If the engine

does not start right away, do not

hold the key in START (III) for

more than 15 seconds at a time.

Pause for at least 10 seconds

before trying again.

If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls

right away, repeat step 4 with the

accelerator pedal pressed half-way

down. If the engine starts, release

pressure on the accelerator pedal

so the engine does not race.

Starting in Cold Weather at High

Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/

2,400 meters)

Driving

Starting the Engine

191

01/09/28 19:56:53 31SZ3660_194

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your Acura’s transmission has four

forward speeds, and is electronically

controlled for smoother shifting. It

also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter

forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay

feel what seems like another shift

when the converter locks.

This indicator between the fuel

gauge and temperature gauge shows

which position the shift lever is in.

The shift lever has seven positions.

It must be in Park or Neutral to start

the engine. When you are stopped in

D,D,2,1,NorR,pressfirmlyon

the brake pedal, and keep your foot

off the accelerator pedal.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for a

few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes

while driving (in any shift position),

it indicates a possible problem in the

transmission. Avoid rapid acceler-

ation and have the transmission

checkedbyanauthorizedAcura

dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Shift Lever Positions

192

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

01/09/28 19:57:02 31SZ3660_195

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

CONTINUED

Whenever you move the shift lever,

slide it along the guide on the

console.

This position mechani-

cally locks the transmission. Use

Park whenever you are turning off or

starting the engine. To shift out of

Park, you must press on the brake

pedal and have your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Move the shift

lever to the right to shift out of the

Park position.

If you have done all of the above and

still cannot move the lever out of

Park, see Shift Lock Release on page

To avoid transmission damage, come

to a complete stop before shifting

into Park. The shift lever must be in

Park before you can remove the key

from the ignition switch.

To shift to Reverse

from Park, see the explanation under

Park. To shift to Reverse from

Neutral, come to a complete stop and

then shift. Push down on the shift

lever before shifting into Reverse

from Neutral.

Use Neutral if you

need to restart a stalled engine, or if

it is necessary to stop briefly with

the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-

tion if you need to leave the car for

any reason. Press on the brake pedal

when you are moving the shift lever

from Neutral to another gear.

195

To shift from:

PtoR

NtoR

2to1

1to2

2toD

DtoD

DtoN

DtoD

Dto2

NtoD

RtoN

RtoP

Do this:

Press the brake pedal.

Push down on the shift lever.

Move the lever.

Driving

Automatic Transmission

Park (P)

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

193

01/09/28 19:57:13 31SZ3660_196

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Use this position for

your normal driving. The transmis-

sion automatically selects a suitable

gear for your speed and acceleration.

You may notice the transmission

shifting up at higher speeds when

the engine is cold. This helps the

engine warm up faster.

This position is similar

to D , except only the first three

gears are selected. Use D when

towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to

provide engine braking when going

down a steep hill. D can also keep

the transmission from cycling

between third and fourth gears in

stop-and-go driving.

ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or

D , you can get the transmission to

automatically downshift by pushing

the accelerator pedal to the floor.

The transmission will shift down one

or two gears, depending on your

speed.

This position locks

the transmission in second gear. It

does not downshift to first gear

when you come to a stop. Second

gives you more power when climbing,

and increased engine braking when

going down steep hills. Use second

gear when starting out on a slippery

surface or in deep snow. It will help

reduce wheelspin.

To shift from Second to

First, push down on the shift lever.

With the lever in this position, the

transmission locks in First gear. By

upshifting and downshifting through

1, 2, D and D , you can operate this

transmission much like a manual

transmission without a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speed

for the gear you are in, the engine

speed will enter into the tachometer’s

red zone. If this occurs, you may feel

the engine cut in and out. This is

caused by a limiter in the engine’s

computer controls. The engine will

run normally when you reduce the

RPM below the red zone.

Driving

Automatic Transmission

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter

194

01/09/28 19:57:21 31SZ3660_197

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This allows you to move the shift

lever out of Park if the normal

method of pushing on the brake

pedal does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift

Lock Release slot cover next to

the shift lever.

Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver

or small metal plate (neither are

included in the tool kit) to remove

the cover. Carefully pry on the

edge of the cover.

Push down on the key and move

the shift lever out of Park to

Neutral.

Insert the key in the Shift Lock

Release slot.

If you need to use the Shift Lock

Release, it means your car is

developing a problem. Have the car

checked by your Acura dealer.

Remove the key from the Shift

Lock Release slot, then reinstall

thecover.Makesurethenotchon

the cover is on the right side.

Depress the brake pedal and

restart the engine.

Driving

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release

195

SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTT

01/09/28 19:57:32 31SZ3660_198

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Make sure the moonroof and the

windows are closed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,

in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe

remote transmitter. Check the

indicator on the driver’s door to

verify that the security system is

set.

Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable

materials. The three way catalytic

converter gets very hot, and could

cause these materials to catch on

fire.

Always use the parking brake when

you park your car. The indicator on

the instrument panel shows that the

parking brake is not fully released; it

does not indicate that the parking

brakeisfirmlyset.Makesurethe

parking brake is set firmly or your

car may roll if it is parked on an

incline.

Set the parking brake before you put

the transmission in Park. This keeps

the car from moving and putting

pressure on the parking mechanism

in the transmission making it

easier to move the shift lever out of

Park when you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn the

front wheels away from the curb.

Make sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving away.

Driving with the parking brake

partially set can overheat or damage

the rear brakes.

If the car is facing downhill, turn the

front wheels toward the curb.

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

196

01/09/28 19:57:42 31SZ3660_199

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your Acura is equipped with disc

brakes at all four wheels. A power

assist helps reduce the effort needed

on the brake pedal. The ABS helps

you retain steering control when

braking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal only

when you intend to brake. Resting

your foot on the pedal keeps the

brakes applied lightly, causing them

to build up heat. Heat build-up can

reduce how well your brakes work. It

also keeps your brake lights on all

the time, confusing drivers behind

you.

Constant application of the brakes

when going down a long hill builds

up heat and reduces their effective-

ness. Use the engine to assist the

brakes by downshifting to a lower

gear and taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after driving

through deep water. Apply the

brakes moderately to see if they feel

normal. If not, apply them gently and

frequently until they do. Since a

longer distance is needed to stop

with wet brakes, be extra cautious

and alert in your driving.

All four brakes have audible brake

wear indicators.

When the brake pads need replacing,

you will hear a distinctive metallic

‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply

the brakes. If you do not have the

brake pads replaced, they will begin

screeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squeal

or squeak when you apply them

lightly. Do not confuse this with the

brake wear indicators. They make a

very audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving

197

01/09/28 19:57:52 31SZ3660_200

Main Menu

Table of Contents

this defeats the

purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS

work for you by always keeping firm,

steady pressure on the brake pedal

as you steer away from the hazard.

This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal when the ABS activates, and

you may hear some noise. This is

normal; it is the ABS rapidly

pumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount of

traction your tires have. On dry

pavement, you will need to press on

thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou

activate the ABS. However, you may

feel the ABS activate immediately if

you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Your car has an Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS) as standard

equipment. ABS helps to prevent the

wheels from locking up and skidding

during hard braking, allowing you to

retain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you lose

steering control; the car continues

straightaheadeventhoughyouturn

the steering wheel. The ABS helps to

prevent lock-up and helps you retain

steering control by pumping the

brakes rapidly; much faster than a

person can do it.

The hydraulic system that operates

the brakes has two separate circuits.

Each circuit works diagonally across

the car (the left-front brake is

connected with the right-rear brake,

etc.). If one circuit should develop a

problem, you will still have braking

at two wheels.

The ABS also balances the front-to

rear braking distribution according

to vehicle loading.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the

brake pedal;

The Braking System

Driving

198

FFrroonntt

01/09/28 19:58:01 31SZ3660_201

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊＊

such as trying to take a

corner too fast or making a sudden

lane change. Always drive at a safe,

prudent speed for the road and

weather conditions.

Always steer moderately

when you are braking hard. Severe

or sharp steering wheel movement

can still cause your car to veer into

oncoming traffic or off the road.

only helps with steering control

during braking. You should always

maintain a safe following distance

from other vehicles.

on loose or

uneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow, than a vehicle without anti-

lock. Slow down and allow a greater

distance between vehicles under

those conditions.

The ABS is self-checking. If anything

goes wrong, the ABS indicator on

the instrument panel comes on (see

page ). This means the anti-lock

function of the braking system has

shut down. The brakes still work like

a conventional system without anti-

lock, providing normal stopping

ability. You should have the dealer

inspect your car as soon as possible

if this light stays on after you start

the engine, or comes on while

driving.

CONTINUED

The Braking System

Driving

Important Safety Reminders

ABS Indicator

ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from changing direction

abruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss of

stability.

ABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop the car;

A vehicle with ABS may require a

longer distance to stop

199

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:58:13 31SZ3660_202

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If the ABS indicator and the brake

system indicator come on together,

and the parking brake is fully

released, the front-to-rear braking

distribution system may also shut

down.

Test your brakes as instructed on

page . If the brakes feel normal,

drive slowly and have your car

repaired by your dealer as soon as

possible. Avoid sudden hard braking

which could cause the rear wheels to

lock up and possibly lead to a loss of

control.

The VSA system indicator may come

on along with the ABS indicator if

there is a problem with the anti-lock

brake system.

289

Driving

The Braking System

200

01/09/28 19:58:18 31SZ3660_203

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

The VSA system cannot enhance the

car’s driving stability in all situations

and does not control your vehicle’s

entire braking system. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speeds and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

The Vehicle Stability Assist system

helps to stabilize the vehicle during

cornering if the car turns more or

less than desired. It also assists you

in maintaining traction while

accelerating on loose or slippery

road surfaces. It does this by

regulating the engine’s output, and

by selectively applying braking.

When VSA activates, you may notice

that the engine does not respond to

the accelerator in the same way it

does at other times. You will also see

the VSA Activation Indicator blink. When VSA activates, you will see the

VSA Activation indicator blink.

Driving

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator

201

VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:58:27 31SZ3660_204

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The VSA system indicator (see page

) comes on and stays on when

there is a problem with the VSA

system.

If the VSA indicator comes on while

driving, pull to the side of the road

when it is safe and turn off the

engine. Reset the system by

restarting the engine, and watch the

VSA system indicator. If the

indicator remains on, or comes back

on while driving, have the VSA

system inspected by your Acura

dealer.

When VSA is off, the VSA Activation

Indicator light comes on as a

reminder. Pressing the switch again

turns the system back on.

If the indicator does not come on

when the ignition switch is turned

ON(II),theremaybeaproblem

with the VSA system. Have your

dealer inspect your car as soon as

possible.

Without VSA, your car will have

normal braking and cornering ability,

but it will not have VSA traction and

stability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.

Press it to turn the Vehicle Stability

Assist system on and off.

Driving

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA System Indicator

VSA Off Switch

202

VVSSAA SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 19:58:38 31SZ3660_205

Main Menu

Table of Contents

VSA is turned on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it

off the last time you drove the car.

Driving with varying tire or wheel

sizes may cause the VSA to

malfunction. When replacing tires,

make sure they are of the same size

and type as your original tires (see

page ).

Deactivate the VSA system if you

need to drive with the compact spare

tire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make sure

they are the same size as those that

were originally supplied with your

car. Exercise the same caution

during winter driving as you would if

your car was not equipped with VSA.

257

282

Driving

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA and Tire Sizes

203

01/09/28 19:58:45 31SZ3660_206

Main Menu

Table of Contents

− Exercise extra caution when driving

in rain after a long dry spell. After

months of dry weather, the first

rains bring oil to the surface of the

roadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditions

require a different driving technique

because of reduced traction and

visibility. Keep your car well-

maintained and exercise greater

caution when you need to drive in

bad weather. The cruise control

should not be used in these

conditions.

Always drive

slower than you would in dry

weather. It takes your car longer to

react, even in conditions that may

seem just barely damp. Apply

smooth, even pressure to all the

controls. Abrupt steering wheel

movements or sudden, hard appli-

cation of the brakes can cause loss of

control in wet weather. Be extra

cautious for the first few miles

(kilometers) of driving while you

adjust to the change in driving

conditions. This is especially true in

snow. A person can forget some

snow-driving techniques during the

summer months. Practice is needed

to relearn those skills.

Driving Technique

Driving

Driving in Bad Weather

204

01/09/28 19:58:52 31SZ3660_207

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−−Being able to see

clearly in all directions and being

visible to other drivers are important

in all weather conditions. This is

more difficult in bad weather. To be

seen more clearly during daylight

hours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tires

frequently for wear and proper

pressure. Both are important in

preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of

traction on a wet surface). In the

winter, mount snow tires on all four

wheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,

they can change from moment to

moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-

pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have

patches of ice. Driving conditions

can be very hazardous when the

outside temperature is near freezing.

The road surface can become

covered with areas of water puddles

mixed with areas of ice, so your

traction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. If

traction is low, you can lock up the

drive wheels for a moment and cause

askid.

Be very cautious when passing, or

beingpassedbyothervehicles.The

spray from large vehicles reduces

your visibility, and the wind buffeting

can cause you to lose control.

Inspect your windshield wipers and

washers frequently. Keep the wind-

shield washer reservoir full of the

proper fluid. Have the windshield

wiper blades replaced if they start to

streak the windshield or leave parts

unwiped. Use the defroster and air

conditioning to keep the windows

from fogging up on the inside (see

pages and ).120 125

Visibility Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving

205

01/09/28 19:59:00 31SZ3660_208

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your Acura has been designed

primarily to carry passengers and

their cargo. You can use it to tow a

trailer if you carefully observe the

load limits, use the proper equipment,

and follow the guidelines in this

section.

The weight that

the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer

puts on the hitch should be

approximately 10 percent of the

trailer weight. Too little tongue

load can make the trailer unstable

and cause it to sway. Too much

tongue load reduces front-tire

traction and steering control.

The total

weight of the trailer and

everything loaded in it must not

exceed 2,000 lbs (900 kg). Towing

a load that is too heavy can

seriously affect your car’s

handling and performance. It can

also damage the engine and

drivetrain.

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

206

01/09/28 19:59:08 31SZ3660_209

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The best way to confirm that vehicle

and trailer weights are within limits

is to have them checked at a public

scale.

Using a suitable scale or a special

tongue load gauge, check the tongue

load the first time you set up a

towing combination (a fully-loaded

vehicle and trailer), then recheck the

tongue load whenever the conditions

change.

The total weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, all cargo, and the

tongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, all cargo, and the

tongue load must not exceed:

To achieve a proper tongue load,

start by loading 60 percent of the

load toward the front of the trailer

and 40 percent toward the rear, then

re-adjust the load as needed.

on the rear axle

on the front axle

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR):

207

2,260 lbs (1,025 kg)

2,570 lbs (1,165 kg)

4,830 lbs (2,190 kg)

Exceeding load limits or

improperly loading your vehicle

and trailer can cause a crash in

which you can be seriously

injured or killed.

Check the loading of your

vehicle and trailer carefully

beforestartingtodrive.

01/09/28 19:59:18 31SZ3660_210

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Towing can require a variety of

equipment, depending on the size of

your trailer, how it will be used, and

how much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailer

sales or rental agency, and follow the

guidelines in the rest of this section.

Also make sure that all equipment is

properly installed and that it meets

federal, state, province, and local

regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle must

be properly bolted to the underbody.

Acura recommends that any trailer

having a total weight of 1,000 lbs

(450 kg) or more be equipped with

its own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, be

sure they are electronically actuated.

Do not attempt to tap into your

vehicle’s hydraulic system. No

matter how successful it may seem,

any attempt to attach trailer brakes

to your vehicle’s hydraulic system

will lower braking effectiveness and

create a potential hazard.

Always use safety chains. Make sure

they are secured to both the trailer

and hitch, and that they cross under

the tongue so they can catch the

trailer if it becomes unhitched.

Leave enough slack to allow the

trailer to turn corners easily, but do

not let the chains drag on the ground.

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Towing Equipment and

Accessories

Hitches Trailer Brakes

Safety Chains

208

01/09/28 19:59:28 31SZ3660_211

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a trailer lighting

connector located in the trunk by the

left taillight. To use the connector,

undo the fastener on the left side of

the trunk lining. Refer to the

drawing in this page for the wiring

color code and purpose of each pin.

If you use a converter, you can get

the connector and pins that mate

with the connector in your vehicle

from your Acura dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary in

trailer type and brand, you should

also have a qualified mechanic install

a suitable connector between the

vehicleandthetrailer.

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights

209

GGRROOUUNNDD

((BBLLAACCKK))

RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL

((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT

((RREEDD//BBLLAACCKK))

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))

LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL

((PPIINNKK//BBLLUUEE))

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT

((GGRREEEENN//WWHHIITTEE))

01/09/28 19:59:37 31SZ3660_212

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your vehicle tires and spare are

properly inflated (see page ),

and the trailer tires and spare are

inflated as recommended by the

trailer maker.

When preparing to tow, and before

driving away, be sure to check the

following:

The vehicle has been properly

serviced, and the tires, brakes,

suspension, and cooling system

are in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are within

limits (see pages and ).

Thehitch,safetychains,andany

other attachments are secure.

Allitemsonandinthetrailerare

properly secured and cannot shift

while you drive.

The lights and brakes on your

vehicle and the trailer are working

properly.

Many states and Canadian provinces

require special outside mirrors when

towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,

you should install special mirrors if

you cannot clearly see behind you, or

if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Askyourtrailersalesorrental

agency if any other items are

recommended or required for your

towing situation. 206 207

254

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Pre-Tow Checklist

Additional Trailer Equipment

210

01/09/28 19:59:48 31SZ3660_213

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

The added weight, length, and

height of a trailer will affect your

vehicle’s handling and performance,

so driving with a trailer requires

some special driving skills and

techniques.

Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider

than normal. The trailer tracks a

smaller arc than your vehicle, and it

canhitorrunoversomethingthe

vehicle misses. Allow more time and

distance for braking. Do not brake or

turn suddenly as this could cause the

trailer to jackknife or turn over.

If you must stop when facing uphill,

use the foot brake or parking brake.

Do not try to hold the vehicle in

place by pressing on the accelerator,

as this can cause the automatic

transmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduce

your speed and shift down to 2nd

gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and

remember it will take longer to slow

downandstopwhentowingatrailer.

Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof

others,taketimetopracticedriving

maneuvers before heading for the

open road, and follow the guidelines

discussed below.

When climbing hills, closely watch

your temperature gauge. If it nears

the red (Hot) mark, turn the air

conditioning off, reduce speed and, if

necessary, pull to the side of the

road to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shifts

frequently between 3rd and 4th

gears while going up a hill, shift to

Drive slower than normal in all

driving situations, and obey posted

speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

Use the D position when towing a

trailer on level roads. D is the

proper shift lever position to use

when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.

(See ‘‘ ’’ in the next

column for additional gear

information.)

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

211

01/09/28 20:00:00 31SZ3660_214

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Crosswinds and air turbulence

caused by passing trucks can disrupt

your steering and cause trailer

swaying. When being passed by a

large vehicle, keep a constant speed

and steer straight ahead. Do not try

to make quick steering or braking

corrections.

Follow all normal precautions when

parking, including putting the

transmission in Park and firmly

setting the parking brake. Also, place

wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s

tires.

Always drive slowly and have

someone guide you when backing up.

Grip the of the steering

wheel; then turn the wheel to the left

to get the trailer to move to the left,

andturnthewheelrighttomovethe

trailer to the right.

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

212

01/09/28 20:00:09 31SZ3660_215

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you have the skills and tools to per-

form more complex maintenance

tasks on your Acura, you may want

to purchase the Service Manual. See

page for information on how to

obtain a copy, or see your Acura

dealer.

This section also includes

Maintenance Schedules for normal

driving and severe driving conditions,

a Maintenance Record, and instruc-

tions for simple maintenance tasks

you may want to take care of

yourself.

This section explains why it is

important to keep your car well

maintained and how to follow basic

maintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 214

.Important Safety Precautions . 215

.................Maintenance Schedule . 216

...Required Maintenance Record . 223

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 225

..............................Fluid Locations . 226

......................................Engine Oil . 227

..................................Adding Oil . 227

....................Recommended Oil . 227

..............................Synthetic Oil . 228

....................................Additives . 228

.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 229

.............................Cooling System . 231

............Adding Engine Coolant . 231

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 233

....................Windshield Washers . 237

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 238

..............................Differential Oil . 239

....................................Brake Fluid . 240

............................Brake System . 240

..............................Power Steering . 240

....................................Hood Latch . 241

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 241

....................................Spark Plugs . 243

..............................Replacement . 243

............................Specifications . 246

...........................................Battery . 246

.................................Wiper Blades . 249

..............Air Conditioning System . 251

.................Air Conditioning Filter . 252

.....................................Drive Belts . 252

....................................Timing Belt . 253

...............................................Tires . 253

......................................Inflation . 253

..................................Inspection . 255

..............................Maintenance . 256

.............................Tire Rotation . 256

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 257

......................Wheels and Tires . 258

..........................Winter Driving . 258

.............................Snow Tires . 259

............................Tire Chains . 259

.............................................Lights . 260

........................Replacing Bulbs . 262

...........................Storing Your Car . 271

329

Maintenance

213

01/09/28 20:00:16 31SZ3660_216

Main Menu

Some of the most important safety

precautions are given here. However,

we cannot warn you of every

conceivable hazard that can arise in

performing maintenance. Only you

can decide whether or not you

should perform a given task.

This section includes instructions for

simple maintenance tasks, such as

checking and adding oil. Any service

items not detailed in this section

should be performed by an Acura

technician or other qualified

mechanic.

Regularly maintaining your car is the

best way to protect your investment.

Proper maintenance is essential to

your safety and the safety of your

passengers. It will also reward you

with more economical, trouble-free

driving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

214

Failure to properly follow

maintenance instructions and

precautions can cause you to

be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures

and precautions in this owner’s

manual.

Improperly maintaining this car

or failing to correct a problem

before driving can cause a

crash in which you can be

seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection

and maintenance

recommendations and

schedules in this owner’s

manual.

01/09/28 20:00:22 31SZ3660_217

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Be sure

there is adequate ventilation

whenever you operate the engine.

Let the

engine and exhaust system cool

before touching any parts.

not run the engine unless in-

structed to do so.

Read the instructions before you

begin, and make sure you have the

tools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire or

explosion, be careful when working

around gasoline or batteries. Use a

commercially available degreaser or

parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean

parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and

flames away from the battery and all

fuel-related parts.

Before you begin any maintenance,

make sure your car is parked on

level ground and that the parking

brake is set. Also, be sure the engine

is off. This will help to eliminate

several potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection and

protective clothing when working

near the battery or when using

compressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoning

from engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

215

01/09/28 20:00:30 31SZ3660_218

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The Maintenance Schedule specifies

how often you should have your car

serviced and what things need

attention. It is essential that you have

your car serviced as scheduled to

retain its high level of safety,

dependability, and emissions control

performance.

Avoidexceedingyourcar’sload

limit.Thisputsexcessstresson

the engine, brakes, and many

other parts of your car. The load

limit is shown on the label on the

driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonable

roads within the legal speed limit.

Service your car according to the

time and mileage periods on one of

the Maintenance Schedules on the

following pages. Select the schedule

for ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most of

your driving is done under one or

more of the conditions listed on that

page. Otherwise, follow the schedule

for ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’

Drive your car regularly over a

distance of several miles

(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline with

the proper octane rating (see page

The services and time or distance

intervals shown in the maintenance

schedule assume you will use your

car as normal transportation for

passengers and their possessions.

You should also follow these

recommendations:

178

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

216

01/09/28 20:00:39 31SZ3660_219

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＃

We recommend the use of genuine

Honda parts and fluids whenever you

have maintenance done. These are

manufactured to the same high-

quality standards as the original

components, so you can be confident

of their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federal

regulations, failure to perform

maintenance on the items marked

with will not void your emissions

warranties. However, Acura

recommends that all maintenance

services be performed at the

recommended time or mileage

period to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Acura dealer knows

your car best and can provide

competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is not

mandatory to keep your warranties

in effect. Maintenance may be done

by any qualified service facility or

person who is skilled in this type of

automotive service. Keep all the

receipts as proof of completion, and

have the person who does the work

fill out the Maintenance Record.

Check your warranty booklet for

more information.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement or

repair of emissions control

devices and systems may be done

by any automotive repair

establishment or individual using

parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA

standards.

217

01/09/28 20:00:45 31SZ3660_220

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

＃

Follow the Normal Conditions

Maintenance Schedule if the

severe driving conditions

specified in the Severe

Conditions Maintenance

Schedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you only

drive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you should

follow the Normal Conditions

Maintenance Schedule.

Follow the Maintenance

Schedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

218

Visually inspect the following items:

Service at the indicated

distance or time whichever

comes first.

miles x 1,000

km x 1,000

months

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Cooling system hoses and connections

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil filter

Check engine oil and coolant

Replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt, balancer belt, and inspect

water pump

Inspect and adjust drive belts

Inspect idle speed

Replace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Replace front differential fluid

Inspect front and rear brakes

Replace brake fluid

Check parking brake adjustment

Replace air conditioning filter

Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition

at least once per month)

120

144

105

168

120

192

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

: 217

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions

01/09/28 20:01:04 31SZ3660_221

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

□

＃

Maintenance

219

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D

7,500 mi/12,000 km

15,000 mi/24,000 km/1yr

22,500 mi/36,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs

37,500 mi/60,000 km/

45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

52,500 mi/84,000 km/

60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

67,500 mi/108,000 km

75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

82,500 mi/132,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs

97,500 mi/156,000 km

105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

DoitemsinA,B,D.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

DoitemsinA,B,C,D.

Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, balancer belt, and inspect

water pump.

Check idle speed.

Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace transmission fluid, then every 90,000

mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace engine oil.

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 256 ).

Replace engine oil filter.

Inspect front and rear brakes.

Check parking brake adjustment.

Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.

Inspect suspension components.

Inspect driveshaft boots.

Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).

Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check

for leaks.

Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.

Replace air conditioning filter.

Replace brake fluid (every 3 years regardless of

mileage).

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last

column, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

NOTE:

217

218

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)

01/09/28 20:01:13 31SZ3660_222

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

＃

＊

−

＃＊＊

＊

＃＃

Follow the Severe Conditions

Maintenance Schedule if you

drive your car under

one or more of the following

conditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8

km) per trip or, in freezing

temperatures, driving less

than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot

[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long

periods of stop-and-go driving.

Trailer towing, driving with a

roof rack, or driving in

mountainous conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or

de-iced roads.

Follow the Maintenance

Schedule for Severe Conditions.

MAINLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

220

Visually inspect the following items:

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service at the indicated

distance or time whichever

comes first.

miles x 1,000

km x 1,000

months

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Check engine oil and coolant

Clean ( ) or replace ( ) air cleaner element

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pump

Inspect and adjust drive belts

Inspect idle speed

Replace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Replace front differential fluid

Inspect front and rear brakes

Replace brake fluid

Check parking brake adjustment

Replace air conditioning filter

Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches

Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition

at least once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components, Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Cooling system hoses and connections

Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody

120

144

120

192

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

105

168

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000

miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

217

253

252

Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

01/09/28 20:01:35 31SZ3660_223

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

□

＃＊＊

＃

＊

＃

CONTINUED

Maintenance

221

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D, E

U.S. Owners

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

3,750 mi/6,000 km

7,500 mi/12,000 km

11,250 mi/18,000 km

15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr

18,750 mi/30,000 km

22,500 mi/36,000 km

26,250 mi/42,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs

33,750 mi/54,000 km

37,500 mi/60,000 km

41,250 mi/66,000 km

45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs

48,750 mi/78,000 km

52,500 mi/84,000 km

56,250 mi/90,000 km

60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Clean air cleaner element.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

DoitemsinA,B,C,D.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

Clean air cleaner element.

DoitemsinA,B,C,E.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pump.

DoitemsinA,B,C,D.

Replace transmission fluid, then replace every

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.

Replace engine oil and filter.

Inspect front and rear brakes.

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 256 ).

Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.

Inspect suspension components.

Inspect driveshaft boots.

Check parking brake adjustment.

Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with

multipurpose grease.

Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).

Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check

for leaks.

Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.

Inspect the underbody.

Replace air cleaner element.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.

Replace air conditioning filter .

Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of

mileage).

See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement information under special driving

conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

NOTE :

220

253

252

217

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)

01/09/28 20:01:48 31SZ3660_224

Main Menu

Table of Contents

□

＊＊

＊

＃

Maintenance

222

See timing belt on page for replacement information under

special driving conditions.

See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement

information under special driving conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last

column, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

NOTE:

252

217

253

63,750 mi/102,000 km

67,500 mi/108,000 km

71,250 mi/114,000 km

75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs

78,750 mi/126,000 km

82,500 mi/132,000 km

86,250 mi/138,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs

90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

93,750 mi/150,000 km

97,500 mi/156,000 km

101,250 mi/162,000 km

105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km

112,500 mi/180,000 km

116,250 mi/186,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

Clean air cleaner element.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.

Replace transmission fluid.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pump.

Check idle speed.

Clean air cleaner element.

Replace spark plugs.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Replace front differential fluid.

Replace timing belt , balancer belt , and

inspect water pump.

DoitemsinA,B,C,D.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace transmission fluid.

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)

01/10/11 11:46:32 31SZ3660_225

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

223

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe

conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

(or 2 years)

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km

72,000 km

(or 3 years)

78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km

(or 4 years)

220

218

01/09/28 20:02:03 31SZ3660_226

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

224

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

(or 5 years)

126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km

(or 6 years)

150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km

168,000 km

(or 7 years)

174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km

(or 8 years)

01/09/28 20:02:10 31SZ3660_227

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Youshouldcheckthefollowing

items at the specified intervals. If

you are unsure of how to perform

any check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check every

time you fill the fuel tank. See

page .

Engine coolant level Check the

radiator reserve tank every time

youfillthefueltank.Seepage .

Windshield washer fluid Check

the level in the reservoir monthly.

If weather conditions cause you to

use the washers frequently, check

the reservoir each time you stop

for fuel. See page .

Lights Check the operation of

the headlights, parking lights,

taillights, high-mount brake light,

turn signals, brake lights, and

license plate lights monthly. See

page .

Tires Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for

wear and foreign objects. See page

Automatic transmission Check

the fluid level monthly. See page

Brakes Check the fluid level

monthly. See page .

181

182

237

238

240

255

260

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance

225

01/09/28 20:02:19 31SZ3660_228

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

226

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC

TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

FFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG

FFLLUUIIDD

((RReedd ccaapp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD

((GGrraayy ccaapp))

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD

((BBlluuee ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL

FFIILLLL CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

EENNGGIINNEE

CCOOOOLLAANNTT

RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

01/09/28 20:02:24 31SZ3660_229

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To add oil, unscrew and remove the

engine oil fill cap on top of the left

valve cover. Pour in the oil, and

replace the engine oil fill cap.

Tighten it securely. Wait a few

minutes and recheck the oil level. Do

not fill above the upper mark; you

could damage the engine.

Oil is major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.

Always use a premium-grade

detergent oil displaying the API

Certification Seal. This seal indicates

the oil is energy conserving, and that

it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements. It is

highly recommended that you use

Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for

as long as you own it.

Make sure the API Certification Seal

says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

CONTINUED

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance

227

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

01/09/28 20:02:34 31SZ3660_230

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

You may use a synthetic motor oil if

it meets the same requirements

given for conventional motor oil: it

displays the API Certification Seal,

and it is the proper weight as shown

on the chart. When using synthetic

oil, you must follow the oil and filter

change intervals given in the

maintenance schedule.

The numbers on the container’s label

tell you the oil’s viscosity or weight.

Select the oil for your car according

to this chart.

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is

preferred for optimum fuel economy

and year-round protection in your

Acura. You may use a 10W-30 oil if

the temperature in your area never

goes below 20°F ( 7°C).

Your Acura does not need any oil

additives. Purchasing additives for

the engine or transmission will not

increase your car’s performance or

longevity. It only increases the cost

of operating your car.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil Additives

228

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

01/09/28 20:02:42 31SZ3660_231

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Always change the oil and filter

accordingtothetimeanddistance

(miles/kilometers) recommenda-

tions in the maintenance schedule.

The oil and filter collect contami-

nants that can damage your engine if

they are not removed regularly.

Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,

then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove the

engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil

drain bolt and washer from the

bottom of the engine. Drain the oil

into an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter and let the

remaining oil drain. A special

wrench (available from your Acura

dealer) is required to remove the

filter.

Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from

underneath the car. The car should

be raised on a service station-type

hydraulic lift for this service. Unless

you have the knowledge and proper

equipment, you should have this

maintenance done by a skilled

mechanic.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance

229

OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR

OOIILL DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

WWAASSHHEERR

01/09/28 20:02:53 31SZ3660_232

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Let the engine run for several

minutes and check the drain bolt

and oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit for

several minutes, then check the oil

level. If necessary, add oil to bring

the level to the upper mark on the

dipstick.

Install a new oil filter according to

instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,

then reinstall the drain bolt.

Tighten it to:

Refill the engine with the recom-

mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity

(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.

Start the engine. The oil pressure

indicator light should go out within

five seconds. If it does not, turn off

the engine and reinspect your

work.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

230

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

4.9 US qt (4.6

, 4.0 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can be

harmf ul to the environment. If you

change your own oil, please dispose of

the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed

container and take it to a recycling

center. Do not discard it in a trash bin

or dump it on the ground.

01/09/28 20:03:03 31SZ3660_233

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If the coolant level in the reserve

tank is at or below the MIN line, add

coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.

Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

The coolant you add should always

be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze

and 50 percent water. Never add

straight antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completely

empty, you should also check the

coolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiator

are cool.

Always use Honda All Season

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This

coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent

antifreeze and 50 percent water. It

does not require any additional

mixing.

If it is not available, you may use

another major-brand non-silicate

coolant as a temporary replacement.

Make sure it is a high-quality coolant

recommended for aluminum engines.

However, continued use of any non-

Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the cooling

system to malfunction or fail. Have

the cooling system flushed and

refilled with Honda antifreeze/

coolant as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance

231

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

Removing the radiator cap

while the engine is hot can

cause the coolant to spray out,

seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and

radiator cool down before

removing the radiator cap.

01/09/28 20:03:12 31SZ3660_234

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX

and MIN marks. Put the cap back

on the reserve tank.

Put the radiator cap back on.

Tighten it fully.

The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add

coolant if it is low.

Remove the radiator cap by

pushing down and turning

counterclockwise.

Turn the radiator cap counter-

clockwise, without pressing down

on it, until it stops. This relieves

any pressure remaining in the

cooling system.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your car’s cooling

system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or engine compo-

nents.

Cooling System

Maintenance

232

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

01/09/28 20:03:22 31SZ3660_235

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Loosen the drain plug on the

bottom of the radiator. The

coolant will come out through the

hole in the splash cover.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn

the heater temperature control

dial to maximum heat (climate

control to 90°F/32°C). Turn off

the ignition. Open the hood. Make

sure the engine and radiator are

cool to the touch.

Remove the radiator cap.

Thecoolingsystemshouldbe

completely drained and refilled with

new coolant according to the time

and distance recommendations in

the maintenance schedule. Only use

Honda All Season Antifreeze/

Coolant Type 2. Use of any non-

Honda coolant or plain water can

result in corrosion and deposits in

the cooling system.

Draining the coolant requires access

to the underside of the car. Unless

you have the tools and knowledge,

you should have this maintenance

done by a skilled mechanic.

CONTINUED

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance

233

DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

01/09/28 20:03:32 31SZ3660_236

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Remove the reserve tank from its

holder by pulling it straight up.

Drain the coolant, then put the

tank back in its holder.

When the coolant stops draining,

tightenthedrainplugatthe

bottom of the radiator.

Put the drain cap back in place

tightly, then reinstall the clip on

the drain cap securely.

On the right side of the engine

block, remove the clip with a plier,

andthenremovethedraincap.

5.4.

Cooling System

Maintenance

234

CCLLIIPP

DDRRAAIINN CCAAPP

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPP

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK HHOOLLDDEERR

01/09/28 20:03:39 31SZ3660_237

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Remove the two bolts and the

three nuts with a 7/16 in (10 mm)

wrench, then remove the engine

cover.

Loosen the bleeder bolt on top of

the engine.

Pour Honda All Season

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into

the radiator up to the base of the

filler neck. This coolant is a

mixture of 50 percent antifreeze

and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing

is not required.

The cooling system capacity is:

Tighten the bleeder bolt when

coolant comes out in a steady

stream with no bubbles.

7. 8.

10.

CONTINUED

Cooling System

Maintenance

235

BBOOLLTTSS

BBLLEEEEDDEERR BBOOLLTT

NNUUTTSS

1.61 US gal (6.1 , 1.34 Imp gal)

01/09/28 20:03:50 31SZ3660_238

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Install the radiator cap, and

tighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tank

to the MAX mark. Install the

reserve tank cap.

Remove the radiator cap. Pour

coolant into the radiator up to the

base of the filler neck and into the

reserve tank up to the MAX mark.

Start the engine and hold it at

1,500 rpm until the cooling fan

comes on. Turn off the engine.

Check the coolant level in the

radiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the engine cover. First

tighten the two bolts on the front

of the engine cover, then tighten

the three nuts on the engine cover.

Tightening torque:

Install the radiator cap, and

tighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run until

the radiator cooling fan comes on

at least twice. Then stop the

engine.Fill the reserve tank to the MAX

mark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Check the level in the radiator,

add coolant if needed.

12.

11.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

Cooling System

Maintenance

236

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

01/09/28 20:04:03 31SZ3660_239

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality

windshield washer fluid. This

increases the cleaning capability and

prevents freezing in cold weather.

Check the level in the windshield

washer reservoir at least monthly

during normal usage. In bad weather,

when you use the washers often,

check the level every time you stop

for fuel.

The windshield washer reservoir is

located behind the driver’s side

headlight.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the

float. It should be up to the top of the

neck.Ifthefloatisatthebottomof

the neck, the reservoir is nearly

empty. When you refill the reservoir, clean

the edges of the windshield wiper

blades with windshield washer fluid

on a clean cloth. This will help to

condition the blade edges.

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

237

FFLLOOAATT

Do not use engine antif reeze or a

vinegar/water solution in the

windshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,

while a vinegar/water solution can

damage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-available

windshield washer f luid.

01/09/28 20:04:10 31SZ3660_240

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Check the fluid level with the engine

at normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission and wipe it

with a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick into the

transmission. Make sure the notch

in the rubber cap fits in the

dipstick guide and that you push

the dipstick in all the way.

Remove the dipstick and check

the fluid level. It should be

between the upper and lower

marks.

Park the car on level ground. Shut

off the engine.

If the level is below the lower

mark, add fluid into the tube to

bring it to the upper mark. Always

use Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic

Transmission Fluid). If it is not

available, you may use a

DEXRON

III automatic

transmission fluid as a temporary

replacement. However, continued

use can affect shift quality. Have

the transmission flushed and

refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as

soon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the

transmission, the technician

should drain and refill it with

Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic

Transmission Fluid), then drive

the vehicle a short distance. Do

this three times. Then drain and

refill the transmission a final time.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

238

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK GGUUIIDDEE

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

01/09/28 20:04:21 31SZ3660_241

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

UseaSAE90orSAE80W-90

viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service

classified GL4 or GL5 only, in the

differential.

The differential oil should be drained

andrefilledwithnewoilaccordingto

the time and distance recommenda-

tions in the maintenance schedule.

Viscosity

If it is not, slowly add oil until it

starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall

the filler plug and tighten it securely.

Check the oil in the differential with

the car sitting level. Remove the oil

filler plug and check that the oil level

is up to the edge of the hole.

Insert the dipstick back in the

transmission. Make sure the notch

fits in the dipstick guide and the

dipstick is down all the way.

The transmission should be drained

and refilled with new fluid according

to the time and distance recommen-

dations in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

Differential Oil

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil

239

FFIILLLLEERR PPLLUUGGDDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG

CCoorrrreecctt

lleevveell

SAE 90: above 0°F ( 18°C)

SAE 80W-90: below 0°F ( 18°C)

01/09/28 20:04:31 31SZ3660_242

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The fluid level should be between

theMINandMAXmarksontheside

of the reservoir. If the level is at or

below the MIN mark, your brake

system needs attention. Have the

brake system inspected for leaks or

worn brake pads.

Check the fluid level in the brake

fluid reservoir monthly.

The brake fluid should be replaced

according to the time recommenda-

tion in the maintenance schedule.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty

Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not

available, you should use only DOT 3

or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed

container, as a temporary

replacement. However, the use of

any non-Honda brake fluid can cause

corrosion and decrease the life of the

system. Have the brake system

flushed and refilled with Honda

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as

soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not

compatible with your car’s braking

system and can cause extensive

damage.

You should check the fluid level in

the power steering reservoir at least

once a year. Check the level when

the engine is cold. Look at the side

of the reservoir. The fluid should be

between the UPPER LEVEL and

LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the

LOWER LEVEL, add power steering

fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Brake System Power SteeringBrake Fluid

Maintenance

Brake Fluid, Power Steering

240

MMIINNMMAAXX

LLOOWWEERR

LLEEVVEELL

UUPPPPEERR

LLEEVVEELL

01/09/28 20:04:43 31SZ3660_243

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The air cleaner element should be

cleaned or replaced according to the

time and distance recommendations

in the maintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element by

blowing compressed air through it in

the opposite direction to normal air

flow. If you do not have access to

compressed air (such as a service

station), ask your Acura dealer to do

this service.

Follow the replacement procedure

for removal and reinstallation.

Always use Honda Power Steering

Fluid. If it is not available, you may

use another power steering fluid as

an emergency replacement.

However, continued use can cause

increased wear and poor steering in

cold weather. Have the power

steering system flushed and refilled

with Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level can

indicate a leak in the system. Check

the fluid level frequently and have

the system inspected as soon as

possible. Clean the hood latch assembly with a

mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a

multipurpose grease. Lubricate all

the moving parts (as shown),

including the pivot. Follow the time

and distance recommendations in

the Maintenance Schedule. If you

are not sure how to clean and grease

the latch, contact your Acura dealer.

CONTINUED

Air Cleaner ElementHood Latch

Maintenance

Power Steering, Hood Latch, Air Cleaner Element

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

241

PPIIVVOOTTSS

LLAATTCCHH

AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t

or right lock and holding it there can

damage the power steering pump.

01/09/28 20:04:54 31SZ3660_244

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Place the new air cleaner element

in the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housing

cover, snap the four hold-down

clamps back into place.

Remove the old air cleaner

element.

Remove the air cleaner housing

cover. Do not disconnect the air

intake tube from the air cleaner

housing cover.

Unsnap the four clamps holding

the air cleaner housing cover.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside the

air cleaner housing on the passenger’s

side of the engine compartment.

Carefully clean the inside of the

air cleaner housing with a damp

rag.

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance

Replacement

242

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR

EELLEEMMEENNTT

CCLLAAMMPPSS

01/09/28 20:05:05 31SZ3660_245

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Clean up any dirt and oil that have

collected around the ignition coils.

Remove the two bolts and the four

nuts with a wrench and remove

the tower bar. Then remove the

A/C tube from the three clips.

Remove the two bolts and the

three nuts with a 7/16 inch (10

mm) wrench, then remove the

engine cover.

The spark plugs in your car are a

special platinum-tipped design for

longer life. The spark plugs should

be replaced according to the time

and distance recommendations in

the maintenance schedule.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Replacement

Spark Plugs

Maintenance

243

BBOOLLTTSS

NNUUTTSS

BBOOLLTTSSNNUUTTSS

NNUUTTSS

01/09/28 20:05:17 31SZ3660_246

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Put the new spark plug into the

socket, then screw it into the hole.

Screw it in by hand so you do not

crossthread it.

Use a wrench to remove the two

bolts holding the ignition coil.

Remove the ignition coil by pulling

it straight out.

Remove the spark plug with

a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark

plug socket.

Disconnect the wire connector

from the ignition coil by pushing

on the lock tab and pulling on the

connector. Pull on the plastic

connector, not the wires.

4. 5.

Spark Plugs

Maintenance

244

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR

BBOOLLTTSS

01/09/28 20:05:25 31SZ3660_247

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Install the ignition coil. Reinstall

the two hold-down bolts.

Repeat this procedure for the

other five spark plugs.

Torque the spark plug. (If you do

not have a torque wrench, tighten

the spark plug two-thirds of a turn

after it contacts the cylinder head.)

Tightening torque:

Put the A/C tube back in place.

Install the tower bar and tighten

the two bolts and the four nuts.

Tightening torque:

Push the wire connector onto the

ignition coil. Make sure it locks in

place.

Install the engine cover. First

tighten the two bolts on the front

of the engine cover, then tighten

the three nuts on the engine cover.

Tightening torque:

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

CONTINUED

Spark Plugs

Maintenance

245

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

16 lbf·ft (22 N·m , 2.2 kgf·m)

7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A

spark plug that is too loose can

overheat and damage the engine.

Overtightening can cause damage to

the threads in the cylinder head.

01/09/28 20:05:37 31SZ3660_248

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＋

−

Spark Plug Gap:

Check the battery condition by

looking at the test indicator window

on the battery.

The label on the battery explains the

test indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your car’s

battery monthly. You should check

the color of the test indicator window,

and for corrosion on the terminals.

NGK:

DENSO:

BatterySpecifications:

Spark Plugs, Battery

Maintenance

246

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

PFR5L-11

PK16PR-L11

0.1 mm

01/09/28 20:05:46 31SZ3660_249

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Check the battery terminals for

corrosion (a white or yellowish

powder). To remove it, cover the

terminals with a solution of baking

soda and water. It will bubble up and

turn brown. When this stops, wash it

off with plain water. Dry off the

battery with a cloth or paper towel.

Coat the terminals with grease to

help prevent future corrosion.

If the terminals are severely cor-

roded, clean them with baking soda

and water. Then use a wrench to

loosen and remove the cables from

the terminals. Always disconnect the

negative ( ) cable first and recon-

nect it last. Clean the battery termi-

nals with a terminal cleaning tool or

wire brush. Reconnect and tighten

the cables, then coat the terminals

with grease.

If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to

prevent damage to the car’s

electrical system.

Battery posts,

terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

247

The battery gives off explosive

hydrogen gas during normal

operation.

A spark or flame can cause the

battery to explode with enough

force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a

face shield, or have a skilled

mechanic do the battery

maintenance.

01/09/28 20:05:55 31SZ3660_250

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Make sure the climate control sys-

tem is off.

Start the engine and let it run until

it warms up (the radiator cooling

fan comes on at least twice), and

let it idle for five more minutes.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, the engine’s computer

needs to ‘‘relearn’’ the idle control.

After replacing or recharging the

battery:

Your driver’s power window (see

page ) and your audio system

will also disable itself when the bat-

tery is disconnected or goes dead.

Thenexttimeyouturnontheradio

you will see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequency

display. Use the Preset buttons to en-

ter the five-digit code (see page ).

104

156

Battery

Maintenance

248

Charging the battery with the cables

connected can seriously damage your

car’s electronic controls. Detach the

battery cables bef ore connecting the

battery to a charger.

01/09/28 20:06:01 31SZ3660_251

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Check the condition of the wiper

blades at least every six months.

Look for signs of cracking in the

rubber, or areas that are getting

hard. Replace the blades if you find

these signs, or if they leave streaks

and unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assembly

fromthewiperarmbypushingin

the lock tab. Hold it in while you

push the blade assembly toward

thebaseofthearm.

To replace the blade:

Turn the ignition ON (II), switch

the wipers to INT or (low

position), then turn the ignition

OFF when the wiper arm is

approximately midway in its travel.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

249

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

LLOOCCKK

TTAABB

01/09/28 20:06:10 31SZ3660_252

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Remove the blade from its holder

by grasping the tabbed end of the

blade. Pull firmly until the tabs

come out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. If

they have no plastic or metal rein-

forcement along the back edge,

remove the metal reinforcement

strips from the old wiper blade and

install them in the slots along the

edge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it

locks in place.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II)

and return the windshield wipers

to their park position.

3. 4.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

250

BBLLAADDEE BBLLAADDEE

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

01/09/28 20:06:18 31SZ3660_253

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Run the air conditioning at least once

a week during the cold weather

months. Run it for at least ten

minutes while you are driving at a

steady speed with the engine at

normal operating temperature. This

circulates the lubricating oil con-

tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get as

cold as before, have your dealer

check the system. Recharge the

system with Refrigerant HFC-134a

(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

Periodically check the engine’s

radiator and air conditioning

condenser for leaves, insects, and

dirt stuck to the front surface. These

block the air flow and reduce cooling

efficiency. Use a light spray from a

hose or a soft brush to remove them.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed

system. Any major maintenance,

such as recharging, should be done

by a qualified mechanic. You can do

a couple of things to make sure the

air conditioning works efficiently. 312

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance

251

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioning

system serviced, make sure the service

f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling

system. This system captures the

ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing

ref rigerant into the atmosphere can

damage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bend

easily. Only use a low-pressure spray

or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

01/09/28 20:06:26 31SZ3660_254

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−−

The belts should have the following

‘‘play’’ or deflection.

Alternator belt:

Check the condition of the three

drive belts. Examine the edges of

each belt for cracks or fraying.

This filter should be replaced every

30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor-

mal conditions. It should be replaced

every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you

drive primarily in urban areas that

have high concentrations of soot in

the air from industry and diesel-pow-

ered vehicles. Replace it more often

if air flow from the climate control

system becomes less than usual.

Have dust and pollen filter replaced

by your Acura dealer.

Check the tension of each belt by

pushingonitwithyourthumb

midway between the pulleys.

If you see signs of wear or looseness,

have your dealer adjust or replace

the belts.

Power steering belt:

Compressor belt:

The dust and pollen filter removes

pollen and dust that is brought in

from the outside through the climate

control system.

Air Conditioning Filter Drive Belts

Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts

Maintenance

252

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG

BBEELLTT

AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

CCOOMMPPRREESSSSOORR BBEELLTT

0.37 0.45 in (9.5 11.5 mm)

0.41 0.49 in (10.5 12.5 mm)

0.31 0.43 in (8.0 11.0 mm)

01/09/28 20:06:39 31SZ3660_255

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−−

We recommend that you visually

check your tires every day. If you

think a tire might be low, check it

immediately with a tire gauge.

The timing belt and balancer belt

should normally be replaced at the

intervals shown in the maintenance

schedule.

In very high temperatures

(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures

(under 20°F, 29°C).

To safely operate your car, your tires

must be the proper type and size, in

good condition with adequate tread,

and correctly inflated. The following

pages give more detailed information

on how and when to check air

pressure, how to inspect your tires

for damage and wear, and what to do

when your tires need to be replaced.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles

(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if you

regularly drive your car in one or

more of these conditions:

Keeping the tires properly inflated

provides the best combination of

handling, tread life, and riding

comfort. Underinflated tires wear

unevenly, adversely affect handling

and fuel economy, and are more

likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your car

ride more harshly, are more prone to

damage from road hazards, and wear

unevenly.

CONTINUED

InflationTiresTiming Belt

Timing Belt, Tires

Maintenance

253

Using tires that are excessively

worn or improperly inflated can

cause a crash in which you can

be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this

owner’s manual regarding tire

inflation and maintenance.

01/09/28 20:06:49 31SZ3660_256

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Use a gauge to measure the air

pressure at least once a month. Even

tires that are in good condition may

lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1

to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.

Remember to check the spare tire at

thesametimeyoucheckallthe

other tires.

The following chart shows the

recommended cold tire pressures for

most normal driving conditions and

speeds. Tire pressures for high

speed driving are the same as for

normal driving.

These pressures are also given on

thetireinformationlabelonthe

driver’s doorjamb.

Thecompactsparetirepressureis:

If you check the pressure when the

tires are hot (the car has been driven

several miles), you will see readings

4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4

kgf/cm ) higher than the cold

reading. This is normal. Do not let

air out to match the specified cold

pressure. The tire will be

underinflated.

Youshouldgetyourowntire

pressure gauge and use it whenever

you check your tire pressures. This

will make it easier for you to tell if a

pressure loss is due to a tire problem

and not due to a variation between

gauges.

Check the pressure in the tires when

they are cold. This means the car

has been parked for at least three

hours. If you have to drive the car

before checking the tire pressure,

the tires can still be considered

‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

for Normal Driving

Front/Rear:

Recommended Tire Pressures for

Normal Driving

Tires

Maintenance

254

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1

kgf/cm

)

P225/55R16 94V

01/09/28 20:07:02 31SZ3660_257

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Tubeless tires have some ability to

self-seal if they are punctured.

However, because leakage is often

very slow, you should look closely

for punctures if a tire starts losing

pressure.

Every time you check inflation, you

should also examine the tires for

damage, foreign objects, and wear.

Youshouldlookfor:

Bumps or bulges in the tread or

side of the tire. Replace the tire if

youfindeitheroftheseconditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side

of the tire. Replace the tire if you

can see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Your car’s tires have wear indicators

molded into the tread. When the

tread wears down to that point, you

will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide

band running across the tread. This

shows there is less than 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A

tire that is this worn gives very little

traction on wet roads. You should

replace the tire if you can see the

tread wear indicator in three or more

places around the tire.

Inspection

Tires

Maintenance

255

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS

01/09/28 20:07:12 31SZ3660_258

Main Menu

Table of Contents

In addition to proper inflation,

correct wheel alignment helps to

decrease tire wear. If you find a tire

is worn unevenly, have your dealer

check the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced by

the factory. They may need to be

rebalanced at some time before they

are worn out. Have your dealer

check the tires if you feel a consis-

tent vibration while driving. A tire

should always be rebalanced if it is

removed from the wheel for repair. To help increase tire life and

distribute wear more evenly, you

should have the tires rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the

tires to the positions shown in the

chart each time they are rotated.

Make sure the installer balances the

wheels when you have new tires

installed. This increases riding

comfort and tire life. Your car’s

original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’

balanced at the factory. For best

results, have the installer perform a

dynamic balance.

Maintenance Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance

256

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaall

TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaall

TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

Improper wheel weights can damage

your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use

only Genuine Acura wheel weights f or

balancing.

01/09/28 20:07:23 31SZ3660_259

Main Menu

Table of Contents

When shopping for replacement

tires, you may find that some tires

are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they

are designed to rotate only in one

direction. If you use directional tires,

they should be rotated only front-to-

back.

The tires that came with your car

were selected to match the perform-

ance capabilities of the car while

providing the best combination of

handling, ride comfort, and long life.

Youshouldreplacethemwithradial

tires of the same size, load range,

speed rating, and maximum cold tire

pressure rating (as shown on the

tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and

bias-ply tires on your car can reduce

its braking ability, traction, and

steering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at

thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible

or necessary, then replace the two

front tires or the two rear tires as a

pair. Replacing just one tire can

seriously affect your car’s handling.

CONTINUED

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance

257

Installing improper tires on your

car can affect handling and

stability. This can cause a crash

in which you can be seriously

hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of

tires recommended in this

owner’s manual.

01/09/28 20:07:29 31SZ3660_260

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or

‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an

all-weather tread design. They

should be suitable for most winter

driving conditions. Tires without

these markings are designed for

optimum traction in dry conditions.

They may not provide adequate

performance in winter driving.

For the best performance in snowy

or icy conditions, you should install

snow tires or tire chains. They may

be required by local laws under

certain conditions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information about

DOT Tire Quality Grading.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,

make sure you use an identical style

aluminum alloy wheel that originally

came on your Acura. Replacement

wheels are available at your Acura

dealer.

The ABS and VSA system work by

comparing the speed of the wheels.

When replacing tires, use the same

size originally supplied with the car.

Tire size and construction can affect

wheel speed and may cause the

system to work inconsistently. 314

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance

258

16x7JJ

P225/55R16 94V

01/09/28 20:07:38 31SZ3660_261

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you mount snow tires on your

Acura, make sure they are radial

tires of the same size and load range

as the original tires. Mount snow

tiresonallfourwheelstobalance

your car’s handling in all weather

conditions. Keep in mind the traction

provided by snow tires on dry roads

may not be as high as your car’s

original equipment tires. You should

drive cautiously even when the roads

areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer

for maximum speed recommen-

dations.

Because your Acura has limited tire

clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’

cable-type traction devices on the

front tires. Use traction devices only

when required by driving conditions

or local laws. Make sure they are the

correct size for your tires.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not

be used. No matter how tight they

seem to be installed, they can come

into contact with the body and

suspension, causing serious damage.

When installing cables, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions and

mount them as tightly as you can.

Drive slowly with them installed. If

youhearthemcomingincontact

with the body or chassis, stop and

investigate. Make sure the cables are

installed tightly, and that they are

not contacting the brake lines or

suspension. Remove them as soon as

you begin driving on cleared roads.

Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance

259

Traction devices that are the wrong

size or improperly installed can

damage your car’s brake lines,

suspension, body, and wheels. Stop

driving if they are hitting any part of

the car.

01/09/28 20:07:47 31SZ3660_262

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Check the operation of your car’s

exterior lights at least once a month.

A burned out bulb can create an

unsafe condition by reducing your

car’s visibility and the ability to

signal your intentions to other

drivers.

Lights

Maintenance

260

FFRROONNTT FFOOGG LLIIGGHHTT

LLOOWW BBEEAAMM HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//

PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 20:07:53 31SZ3660_263

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)

Fog lights

Parking lights

Taillights

Brake lights

Turn signals

Back-up lights

Hazard light function

License plate light

Side marker lights

High-mount brake light

Daytime running lights (Canadian

models)

Ifyoufindanybulbsareburnedout,

replace them as soon as possible.

Refer to the chart on page to

determinewhattypeofreplacement

bulb is needed.

313

Lights

Maintenance

261

HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEE

LLIIGGHHTTSS

SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILL LLIIGGHHTTSS

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 20:08:00 31SZ3660_264

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Halogen bulbs are used for the high

beam headlight bulbs. When

replacing a high beam headlight bulb,

handle it by its base and protect the

glass from contact with your skin or

hard objects. If you touch the glass,

clean it with denatured alcohol and a

clean cloth.

Open the hood.

Remove the electrical connector

from the bulb by pulling the

connector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather seal

by pulling on the tab.

The low beam headlight bulbs are a

type of high voltage discharge tube.

High voltage can remain in the

circuit even with the light switch off

and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to

examine or change a low beam

headlight bulb yourself. If a low

beam headlight bulb fails, take the

cartoyourdealertohaveitreplaced.

Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed

when your car was new. If you

regularly carry heavy items in the

trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment

may be required. Adjustment of the

headlights should be performed by

an Acura technician or other

qualified mechanic.

Lights

Maintenance

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a High Beam Headlight

Bulb

262

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,

perspiration, or a scratch on the glass

can cause the bulb to overheat and

shatter.

01/10/25 13:37:15 31SZ3660_265

Main Menu

Table of Contents

→

Unclip the end of the hold-down

wire from its slot. Pivot it out of

the way and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,

making sure the bulb is right side

up and the nubs on the bulb base

fit in the indentations in the

headlight assembly. Pivot the hold-

down wire back in place and clip

the end into the slot.

Install the rubber seal over the

back of the headlight assembly.

Make sure it is right side up; it is

marked ‘‘ .’’

Push the electrical connector onto

the new bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.

Your car uses halogen fog light

bulbs. See page for information

on replacing a halogen bulb.

262

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

ReplacingaFogLightBulb

263

WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE

BBUULLBB

01/09/28 20:08:17 31SZ3660_266

Main Menu

Table of Contents

→

Put the light assembly into the

bumper. Tighten the mounting

bolt.

Push the electrical connector onto

the new bulb. Turn on the front

fog lights to test the new bulb.

Install the rubber seal over the

back of the fog light assembly.

Make sure it is right side up; it is

marked ‘‘ .’’

Use a wrench to loosen the light

assembly’s mounting bolt.

Remove the light assembly from

the bumper.

Remove the electrical connector

from the bulb by pulling the

connector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather seal

by pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-down

wire from its slot. Pivot the wire

out of the way and remove the

bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,

making sure the bulb is right side

up and the nubs on the bulb base

fit in the indentations in the fog

light assembly. Pivot the hold-

down wire back in place and clip

the end into the slot.

Lights

Maintenance

264

WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL

BBOOLLTT

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR

BBUULLBB

HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE

01/09/28 20:08:29 31SZ3660_267

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To remove the front turn signal/

parking light bulb, push it in

slightly and turn it

counterclockwise. To remove the

side marker bulb, pull it straight

out of its socket.

Install the new bulb into the

socket.

Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the inner fender cover back.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the holding clip from the

inner fender.

If you are changing the bulb on

the driver’s side, start the engine,

turn the steering wheel all the way

to the right, and turn off the

engine. If you are changing the

bulb on the passenger’s side, turn

the steering wheel to the left.

Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clip. Lock it in

placebypushingonthecenter.

Testthelightstomakesurethe

new bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into the

headlight assembly. Turn it

clockwise to lock it in place.

1. 2.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Front Turn Signal/

Parking and Side Marker Light

Bulbs

265

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

01/09/28 20:08:43 31SZ3660_268

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Open the trunk.

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.

Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the light

assembly by turning it clockwise

until it locks.

Testthelightstomakesurethe

new bulb is working.

Undo the fastener on the side of

the trunk lining by pushing on the

center of the fastener’s head until

it pops in. Pull the lining back. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Determine which of the four bulbs

is burned out: stop/taillights, back-

up light, or turn signal.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Make

sure it is installed under the edge

of the trunk seal.1.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance

266

FFAASSTTEENNEERR

01/09/28 20:08:54 31SZ3660_269

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Open the trunk and remove the

socket from the light assembly by

turning it one-quarter turn counter-

clockwise.

Reset the fastener by pushing on

the pointed end until it pops back

almost flush with the fingers on

the housing.

Put the fastener in the hole in the

side of the trunk lining and push

on the center until it locks (the

center is flush with the head).

Reinstall the socket. Turn it

clockwise until it locks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.

Remove the bulb by pushing it in

slightly and turning it counter-

clockwise.

Testthelightstomakesurethe

new bulb is working.

Replacing a High-mount Brake

Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

267

01/09/28 20:09:06 31SZ3660_270

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket. Push the new bulb in until

it bottoms in the socket.

Put the lens back on the bulb

holder and push it until it latches.

Slide the right side of the light

assembly into the hole. Push on

theleftsidetolatchtheassembly

into place.

Turn on the parking lights and

check that the new bulb is

working.

Remove the license light assembly

by carefully prying on the left

edge of the lens with a flat-tip

screwdriver and pulling the

assembly out.

Remove the lens from the bulb

holder by pulling the lens while

squeezing the tabs on both sides

of the holder.

1. 2.

Replacing a Rear License Plate

Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

268

LLIIGGHHTT AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

BBUULLBB HHOOLLDDEERR

BBUULLBB

LLEENNSS

01/09/28 20:09:17 31SZ3660_271

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Removethelensbycarefully

prying on the edge of the lens with

a fingernail file or a small flat-tip

screwdriver. Do not pry on the

edge of the housing around the

lens.

Door light:

Pry on the top middle of the lens.

Front ceiling light:

Pry on the front edge of the lens

in the middle.

Rear ceiling light:

Pryontherearedgeofthelens

in the middle. Remove the bulb

cover by pulling it straight down.

The courtesy lights in the doors and

roof come apart the same way. They

do not use the same type of bulb.

Vanity mirror light:

Pry on the top middle of the lens.

CONTINUED

Replacing Bulbs in the Interior

Courtesy Lights

Maintenance

Lights

269

DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT FFRROONNTT RREEAARR

01/09/28 20:09:30 31SZ3660_272

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Removethelensbycarefully

prying on the edge of the lens in

the middle with a fingernail file or

a small flat-tip screwdriver. Do not

pry on the edge of the housing

around the lens.

Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metal

tabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Push the new bulb into the metal

tabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of its metal tabs.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Maintenance

Lights

270

TTRRUUNNKK

VVAANNIITTYY MMIIRRRROORR LLIIGGHHTT

01/09/28 20:09:39 31SZ3660_273

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter

(see page ).

Wash and dry the exterior

completely.

Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe

carpeting, floor mats, etc. are

completely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Put

the transmission in Park.

If you need to park your car for an

extended period (more than one

month), there are several things you

should do to prepare it for storage.

Proper preparation helps prevent

deterioration and makes it easier to

get your car back on the road. If

possible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for a

longer period, it should be

supported on jackstands so the

tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if

the car is being stored indoors).

Coverthecarwitha‘‘breathable’’

cover, one made from a porous

material such as cotton.

Nonporous materials, such as

plastic sheeting, trap moisture,

which can damage the paint.

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper blade

arms with a folded towel or rag so

they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a

silicone spray lubricant to all door

and trunk seals. Also, apply a

vehiclebodywaxtothepainted

surfaces that mate with the door

and trunk seals.

If possible, run the engine for a

while periodically (preferably once

amonth).

If you store your car for 12 months

or longer, have your Acura dealer

perform the inspections called for in

the 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000

km) maintenance schedule (Normal

Conditions) as soon as you take it

out of storage (see page ). The

replacements called for in the

maintenance schedule are not

needed unless the car has actually

reached that time or mileage.

229

218

Maintenance

Storing Your Car

271

01/09/28 20:09:53 31SZ3660_274

Main Menu

Table of Contents

272

01/09/28 20:09:55 31SZ3660_275

Main Menu

Regular cleaning and polishing of

your Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’

looking. This section gives you hints

on how to clean your car and

preserve its appearance: the paint,

brightwork, wheels and interior. Also

included are several things you can

do to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 274

.....................................Washing . 274

.......................................Waxing . 275

....................Aluminum Wheels . 275

..........................Paint Touch-up . 275

..................................Interior Care . 276

...................................Carpeting . 276

.................................Floor Mats . 276

.........................................Fabric . 277

...........................................Vinyl . 277

.......................................Leather . 277

...................................Seat Belts . 277

................................Wood Trim . 278

....................................Windows . 278

..........................Air Fresheners . 278

....................Corrosion Protection . 279

.................................Body Repairs . 280

Appearance Care

273

01/09/28 20:10:00 31SZ3660_276

Main Menu

When you have washed and rinsed

the whole exterior, dry it with a

chamois or soft towel. Letting it

air-dry will cause dulling and water

spots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix

in a mild detergent, such as

dishwashing liquid or a product

made especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleaners

recommendedinthisOwner’s

Manual.

Wash your car in a shady area, not in

direct sunlight. If the car is parked in

the sun, move it into the shade and

let the exterior cool down before you

start.

Wash the car using the water and

detergent solution and a soft-

bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.

Start at the top and work your way

down. Rinse frequently.

Frequent washing helps preserve

your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can

scratch the paint, while tree sap and

bird droppings can permanently ruin

the finish.

Rinse the car thoroughly with cool

water to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it for

chips and scratches that could allow

corrosion to start. Repair them with

touch-up paint (see page ).

Check the body for road tar, tree

sap, etc. Remove these stains with

tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it

off immediately so it does not

harm the finish. Remember to re-

wax these areas, even if the rest of

the car does not need waxing.

275

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

274

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners

can damage the paint, metal, and

plastic on your car.

01/09/28 20:10:11 31SZ3660_277

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

You should use a quality liquid or

paste wax. Apply it according to the

instructions on the container. In

general, there are two types of

products:

Waxes A wax coats the finish and

protects it from damage by exposure

to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You

should use a wax on your Acura

when it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/

waxes can restore the shine to paint

that has oxidized and lost some of its

shine. They normally contain mild

abrasives and solvents that remove

the top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Acura if

the finish does not have its original

shine after using a wax.

Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloy

wheels as you do the rest of the

exterior.Washthemwiththesame

solution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-

coat that keeps the aluminum from

corroding and tarnishing. Using

harsh chemicals, including some

commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff

brushes can damage this clear-coat.

Only use a mild detergent and soft

brush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Your dealer has touch-up paint to

match your vehicle’s color. The color

code is printed on a sticker on the

driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to

your dealer so you are sure to get

the correct color.

Always wash and dry the whole car

before waxing it. You should wax

your car, including the metal trim,

whenever water sits on the surface

in large patches. It should form into

beads or droplets after waxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with

removers also takes off the wax.

Remember to re-wax those areas,

even if the rest of the car does not

need waxing. Inspect your car frequently for chips

or scratches in the paint. Repair

them right away to prevent corrosion

of the metal underneath. Use the

touch-up paint only on small chips

and scratches. More extensive paint

damage should be repaired by a

professional.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up

275

01/09/28 20:10:23 31SZ3660_278

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Vacuum the carpeting frequently to

remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make

the carpet wear out faster.

Periodically shampoo the carpet to

keep it looking new. Use one of the

foam-type carpet cleaners on the

market. Follow the instructions that

come with the cleaner, applying it

with a sponge or soft brush. Keep

the carpeting as dry as possible by

not adding water to the foam.

If you remove the floor mat, make

sure to re-anchor it when you put it

back in your car.

If you replace it, use a genuine Acura

floormatthatisdesignedtobeused

with the floor mat anchor in your car.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat in

the driver’s footwell, make sure it

fits properly and that it can be used

with the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats on

top of the anchored mat, otherwise

the additional mats may slide

forward and interfere with the pedals.

The genuine Acura driver’s floor mat

that came with your car was

designed to be hooked over the floor

mat anchor. This keeps the floor mat

from sliding forward and possibly

interfering with the pedals.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

276

01/09/28 20:10:32 31SZ3660_279

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum

cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft

cloth dampened in a solution of mild

soap and water. Use the same

solution with a soft-bristle brush on

more difficult spots. You can also use

commercially-available spray or

foam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from the

leather frequently. Pay particular

attention to the pleats and seams.

Clean the leather with a soft cloth

dampened with clear water, then

buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If

further cleaning is needed, use a

soap specifically for leather, such as

saddle soap. Apply this soap with a

damp,softcloth.Wipedownand

buff as described above.

If your seat belts get dirty, you can

use a soft brush with a mixture of

mild soap and warm water to clean

them. Do not use bleach, dye, or

cleaning solvents. They can weaken

the belt material. Let the belts air-

drybeforeyouusethecar.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of the

material frequently. For general

cleaning, use a solution of mild soap

and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.

To clean off stubborn spots, use a

commercially-available fabric cleaner.

Test it on a hidden area of the fabric

first, to make sure it does not bleach

or stain the fabric. Follow the

instructions that come with the

cleaner.

CONTINUED

Vinyl

Leather

Seat BeltsFabric

Interior Care

Appearance Care

277

LLOOOOPP

01/09/28 20:10:43 31SZ3660_280

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat

belt anchors can cause the belts to

retract slowly. Wipe the insides of

the loops with a clean cloth

dampened in mild soap and warm

water or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,

with a commercially-available glass

cleaner. You can also use a mixture

of one part white vinegar to ten parts

water. This will remove the haze that

builds up on the inside of the

windows. Use a soft cloth or paper

towels to clean all glass and clear

plastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so it

does not spill as you drive.

Clean the wood trim with a soft cloth

dipped in clear water and wipe it dry

with another soft cloth. Soap may

leave a film that dulls the finish.

If you want to use an air freshener/

deodorizer in the interior of your car,

it is best to use a solid type. Some

liquid air fresheners contain chemi-

cals that may cause parts of the

interior trim and fabric to crack or

discolor.

Windows Air Fresheners

Wood Trim

Interior Care

Appearance Care

278

The rear window def ogger and

antenna wires are bonded to the inside

of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-

down can dislodge and break these

wires. When cleaning the rear window,

use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-

side.

01/09/28 20:10:53 31SZ3660_281

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Moisture trapped in body cavities.

Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin

hollows on the underside of the

vehicle stays damp, promoting

corrosion in that area.

Repair chips and scratches in the

paint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drain

holes in the bottom of the doors

and body.

Check the floor coverings for

dampness. Carpeting and floor

mats may remain damp for a long

time, especially in winter. This

dampness can eventually cause

the floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute to

causing corrosion in your car:

Many corrosion-preventive measures

are built into your Acura. You can

help keep your car from corroding

by performing some simple periodic

maintenance:

Use a high-pressure spray to clean

the underside of your car. This is

especially important in areas that

useroadsaltinwinter.Itisalsoa

good idea in humid climates and

areas subject to salt air. Be careful

of the ABS wheel sensors and

wiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventive

coatings on the underside of your

car inspected and repaired

periodically.

Removal of paint and protective

coatings from the exterior and

underside of the car.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care

279

01/09/28 20:11:02 31SZ3660_282

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Make sure the repair facility uses

genuine Acura replacement body

parts. Some companies make sheet

metal pieces that seem to duplicate

the original Acura body parts, but

are actually inferior in fit, finish, and

corrosion resistance. Once installed,

they do not give the same high-

quality appearance.

Takeyourcartoyourauthorized

Acura dealer for inspection after the

repairs are completed. Your dealer

can make sure that quality materials

were used, and that corrosion-

preventive coatings were applied to

all repaired and replaced parts.

When reporting your collision to the

insurance company, tell them you

want genuine Acura parts used in the

repair. Although most insurers

recognize the quality of original

parts, some may try to specify that

the repairs be done with other

available parts. You should investi-

gate this before any repairs have

begun.

Body repairs can affect your car’s

resistance to corrosion. If your car

needs repairs after a collision, pay

close attention to the parts used in

the repair and the quality of the

work.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care

280

01/09/28 20:11:08 31SZ3660_283

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This section covers the more-

common problems that motorists

experience with their vehicles. It

gives you information about how to

safely evaluate the problem and what

to do to correct it. If the problem has

stranded you on the side of the road,

you may be able to get going again.

If not, you will also find instructions

on getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 282

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 283

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 288

Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates

........................Very Slowly . 288

The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 289

................................Jump Starting . 290

............If Your Engine Overheats . 293

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 295

..........Charging System Indicator . 296

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 297

...............Brake System Indicator . 299

..................Closing the Moonroof . 300

..............................................Fuses . 301

..........Checking and Replacing . 302

......................Emergency Towing . 306

Taking Care of the Unexpected

281

01/09/28 20:11:13 31SZ3660_284

Main Menu

Follow these precautions whenever

you are using the compact spare tire:

Thecompactsparetirehasashorter

tread life than a regular tire. Replace

it when you can see the tread wear

indicator bars. The replacement

shouldbethesamesizeanddesign

tire, mounted on the same wheel.

Thecompactsparetireisnot

designed to be mounted on a regular

wheel, and the compact wheel is not

designed for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of the

compact spare tire every time you

check the other tires. It should be

inflated to:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)

under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride and

less traction on some road sur-

faces than the regular tire. Use

greater caution while driving on

this tire.

Do not mount snow chains on the

compact spare.

Your car has a compact spare tire

that takes up less space. Use this

sparetireasatemporaryreplace-

ment only. Get your regular tire

repaired or replaced and put it back

on your car as soon as you can.

The wheel of the compact spare

tire is designed especially to fit

your car. Do not use your spare

tire on another vehicle unless it is

thesamemakeandmodel.

Turn off the VSA system (see

page ).

Driving with the compact spare

tiremayactivatetheVSAsystem.

202

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

282

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

01/09/28 20:11:25 31SZ3660_285

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you have a flat tire while driving,

stop in a safe place to change it.

Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder

of a busy road is dangerous. Drive

slowly along the shoulder until you

gettoanexitoranareatostopthat

is far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunk

floor by lifting up on the back edge.

To keep the trunk floor out of the

way, attach the hook into the slot

in the trunk lid.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and take

the spare tire out of its well.

Turn on the hazard warning lights

and turn the ignition switch to

LOCK (0). Have all the

passengers get out of the car while

you change the tire.

Park the car on firm, level, and

non-slippery ground away from

traffic. Put the transmission in

Park. Apply the parking brake.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

283

TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR

SSPPAARREE TTIIRREEJJAACCKK TTOOOOLL KKIITT

HHOOOOKK

The car can easily roll off the

jack, seriously injuring anyone

underneath.

Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and

never get under the car when it

is supported only by the jack.

01/09/28 20:11:37 31SZ3660_286

Main Menu

Table of Contents

△

Turn the jack’s end bracket

counterclockwise to loosen it, then

remove the jack by lifting it

straight up.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2

turn with the wheel wrench.

Locate the jacking point nearest

the tire you need to change. It is

pointed to by a mark molded

into the underside of the body.

Place the jack under the jacking

point. Turn the end bracket

clockwise until the top of the jack

contacts the jacking point. Make

sure the jacking point tab is

restinginthejacknotch.

6. 7. 8.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

284

JJAACCKK

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

JJAACCKKIINNGG

PPOOIINNTT

01/09/28 20:11:46 31SZ3660_287

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Use the extension and wheel

wrench as shown to raise the

vehicle until the flat tire is off the

ground.

Remove the wheel nuts and flat

tire. Temporarily place the flat tire

on the ground with the outside

surface of the wheel facing up.

You could scratch the wheel if you

putitfacedown.

Before mounting the spare tire,

wipeanydirtoffthemounting

surface of the wheel and hub with

a clean cloth. Wipe the hub

carefully,itmaybehotfrom

driving.

9. 10.

11.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

285

BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

WWHHEEEELL

WWRREENNCCHH

EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

01/09/28 20:11:55 31SZ3660_288

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,

then tighten them in a crisscross

pattern with the wheel wrench

until the wheel is firmly against

the hub. Do not try to tighten

them fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

the same crisscross pattern. Have

the wheel nut torque checked at

the nearest automotive service

facility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the car to the ground and

remove the jack.

12.

13. 14.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

286

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

01/09/28 20:12:03 31SZ3660_289

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

Remove the center cap before

storing the flat tire in the trunk

well.

Remove the spacer basket from

the trunk well.

Wrap the spacer cone and spare

tire wing bolt with cloth or paper

and store them in the trunk well.

Place the flat tire face down in the

sparetirewell.

15.

16.

17.

18.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

287

SSPPAACCEERR BBAASSKKEETT CCEENNTTEERR CCAAPP

FFLLAATT TTIIRREE

WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT

SSPPAACCEERR

CCOONNEE

RRIINNGG

01/09/28 20:12:14 31SZ3660_290

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Diagnosing why your engine won’t

start falls into two areas, depending

on what you hear when you turn the

key to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almost

nothing. The engine’s starter

motor does not operate at all, or

operates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motor

operating normally, or the starter

motor sounds like it is spinning

faster than normal, but the engine

does not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch to

START (III), you do not hear the

normal noise of the engine trying to

start. You may hear a clicking sound

or series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.

The transmission must be in Park

orNeutralorthestarterwillnot

operate.

Sliptheholeatthetopofthejack

over the bracket in the trunk well.

Turn the jack’s end bracket to lock

it in place. Store the tool kit back

in its place.

Close the trunk lid.

Store the center cap and spacer

basket in the trunk. Make sure the

center cap will not get scratched

or damaged.

Unclip the hook from the trunk lid

and lower the trunk floor.

Your car has the Immobilizer

System. You should use a

properly-coded master or valet key

to start the engine (see page ).

A key that is not properly coded

will cause the immobilizer system

indicator in the dash panel to blink

rapidly.

19.

20.

21.

22.

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If Your Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter

Motor Operates Very Slowly

288

Loose items can fly around the

interior in a crash and could

seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools

securely before driving.

01/09/28 20:12:29 31SZ3660_291

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Turn on the headlights and check

their brightness. If the headlights

are very dim or don’t light at all,

the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START

(III). If the headlights do not dim,

check the condition of the fuses. If

thefusesareOK,thereisproba-

bly something wrong with the

electrical circuit for the ignition

switch or starter motor. You will

need a qualified technician to

determine the problem. (See

on page .)

Do you have fuel? Turn the

ignition switch to ON (II) for a

minute and watch the fuel gauge.

The low fuel level warning light

may not be working, so you were

not reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electrical

problem, such as no power to the

fuel pump. Check all the fuses

(see page ).

Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill

need a qualified technician to find

the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably or

go out when you try to start the

engine, either the battery is dis-

charged or the connections are

corroded. Check the condition of

the battery and terminal connec-

tions (see page ). You can

then try jump starting the car from

a booster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’s

speed sounds normal, or even faster

than normal, when you turn the

ignition switch to START (III), but

the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper starting

procedure? Refer to

on page .

290

306

246

290

191

302

306

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

Emergency

Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting the

Engine

289

01/09/28 20:12:40 31SZ3660_292

Main Menu

Table of Contents

You cannot start your Acura by

pushing or pulling it.

Open the hood and check the

physical condition of the battery

(see page ). In very cold

weather, check the condition of

the electrolyte. If it seems slushy

or like ice, do not try jump starting

until it thaws.

If your car’s battery has run down,

you may be able to start the engine

by using a booster battery. Although

this seems like a simple procedure,

you should take several precautions.

To jump start your car, follow these

directions closely:

246

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected

290

A battery can explode if you do

not follow the correct procedure,

seriously injuring anyone

nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,

and smoking materials away

from the battery.

01/09/28 20:12:47 31SZ3660_293

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cable

to the negative ( ) terminal on

the booster battery. Connect the

other end to the ground wire on

the right side of the engine as

shown. Do not connect this jumper

cable to any other part of the

engine.

If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start

that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect one jumper cable to the

positive ( ) terminal on your

Acura’s battery. Connect the other

end to the positive ( ) terminal

on the booster battery.

Turn off all the electrical acces-

sories: climate control, stereo

system, lights, etc.

Put the transmission in Neutral or

Park, and set the parking brake.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Jump Starting

291

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the

electrolyte inside can f reeze.

Attempting to jump start with a f rozen

battery can cause it to rupture.

01/09/28 20:12:56 31SZ3660_294

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Start your car. If the starter motor

still operates slowly, check the

jumper cable connections to make

sure they have good metal-to-

metal contact.

Once your car is running, discon-

nectthenegativecablefromyour

car, then from the booster battery.

Disconnect the positive cable from

your car, then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables

away from each other and any metal

on the car until all are disconnected.

Otherwise, you may cause an

electrical short.

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected

292

BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY

01/09/28 20:13:03 31SZ3660_295

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you see steam and/or spray

coming from under the hood, turn

off the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,

leave the engine running and

watch the temperature gauge. If

the high heat is due to overloading

(climbing a long, steep hill on a

hot day with the A/C running, for

example), the engine should start

to cool down almost immediately.

If it does, wait until the tempera-

ture gauge comes down to the mid-

point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.

Put the transmission in Neutral or

Park and set the parking brake.

Turn off the climate control and all

other accessories. Turn on the

hazard warning indicators.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-

ture gauge should stay in the mid-

range under most conditions. It may

go higher if you are driving up a long

steep hill on a very hot day. If it

climbs to the red mark, you should

determine the reason.

Your car can overheat for several

reasons, such as lack of coolant or a

mechanical problem. The only

indication may be the temperature

gauge climbing to or above the red

mark. Or you may see steam or

spray coming from under the hood.

In either case, you should take

immediate action.

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected

293

Steam and spray from an

overheated engine can

seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam

is coming out.

Driving with the temperature gauge

pointer at the red mark can cause

serious damage to your engine.

01/09/28 20:13:13 31SZ3660_296

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If the temperature gauge stays at

the red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signs

of steam or spray, then open the

hood.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,

check the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below the

MIN mark, add coolant to halfway

between the MIN and MAX marks.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,

such as a split radiator hose.

Everything is still extremely hot,

so use caution. If you find a leak, it

must be repaired before you

continue driving (see

on page ).

If there was no coolant in the

reserve tank, you may also have to

add coolant to the radiator. Let the

engine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-

ture gauge, or lower, before check-

ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavy

cloth, turn the radiator cap

counterclockwise, without pushing

down, to the first stop. This

releases any remaining pressure in

the cooling system. After the

pressure releases, push down on

the cap and turn it until it comes

off.

Start the engine and set the

temperature control dial to

maximum (climate control to

FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add

coolant to the radiator up to the

base of the filler neck. If you do

not have the proper coolant

mixture available, you can add

plain water. Remember to have

the cooling system drained and

refilled with the proper mixture as

soon as you can.

If the temperature stays normal,

check the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank. If it has

gone down, add coolant to the

MAX mark. Put the cap back on

tightly.

Put the radiator cap back on

tightly. Run the engine and watch

the temperature gauge. If it goes

back to the red mark, the engine

needs repair. (See

on page .)

10.

12.

11.306

182

306

Emergency

Towing

Emergency

Towing

If Your Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected

294

Removing the radiator cap

while the engine is hot can

cause the coolant to spray out,

seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and

radiator cool down before

removing the radiator cap.

01/09/28 20:13:24 31SZ3660_297

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Start the engine and watch the oil

pressure indicator. If the light

does not go out within ten seconds,

turn off the engine. There is a

mechanical problem that needs to

be repaired before you can

continue driving. (See

on page .)

Safely pull off the road and shut

off the engine. Turn on the hazard

warning indicators.

This indicator should light when the

ignition switch is ON (II), and go out

after the engine starts. It should

never come on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing, it

indicates that the oil pressure

dropped very low for a moment, then

recovered. If the indicator stays on

with the engine running, it shows

that the engine has lost oil pressure

and serious engine damage is

possible. In either case, you should

take immediate action.

If necessary, add oil to bring the

level back to the full mark on the

dipstick (see page ).

Letthecarsitforaminute.Open

the hood and check the oil level

(see page ). Although oil level

and oil pressure are not directly

connected, an engine that is very

low on oil can lose pressure during

cornering and other driving

maneuvers.

181

227

306

Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

295

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oil

pressure can cause serious mechanical

damage almost immediately. Turn of f

the engine as soon as you can saf ely get

the car stopped.

01/09/28 20:13:33 31SZ3660_298

Main Menu

Table of Contents

By eliminating as much of the

electrical load as possible, you can

drive several miles (kilometers)

before the battery is too discharged

to keep the engine running. Drive to

a service station or garage where

you can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electrical

accessories: radio, climate control,

rear defogger, cruise control, etc.

Try not to use other electrically-

operated controls such as the power

windows. Keep the engine running

and take extra care not to stall it.

Starting the engine will discharge

the battery rapidly.

This indicator should come on when

the ignition switch is ON (II), and go

out after the engine starts. If it

comes on brightly when the engine

is running, it indicates that the

charging system has stopped

charging the battery.

Charging System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

296

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/09/28 20:13:39 31SZ3660_299

Main Menu

Table of Contents

This indicator comes on for a few

seconds when you turn the ignition

switch ON (II). If it comes on at any

other time, it indicates one of the

engine’s emissions control systems

may have a problem. Even though

you may feel no difference in your

car’s performance, it can reduce

your fuel economy and cause your

car to put out excessive emissions.

Continued operation may cause

serious damage.

If the indicator remains on past three

driving trips, or the fuel cap was not

loose or missing, have the car

checked by the dealer as soon as

possible. Drive moderately until the

dealer has inspected the problem.

Avoid full-throttle acceleration and

driving at high speed.

Youshouldalsohavethedealer

inspect your car if this indicator

comes on repeatedly, even though it

may turn off as you continue driving.

If you have recently refueled your

car, the cause of this indicator

coming on could be a loose or

missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap

and tighten it until it clicks several

times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is

missing. Tightening the cap will not

make the indicator turn off

immediately; it takes at least three

driving trips.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected

297

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

If you keep driving with the

malf unction indicator lamp on, you can

damage your car’s emissions controls

and engine. Those repairs may not be

covered by your car’s warranties.

01/09/28 20:13:47 31SZ3660_300

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Your car has certain ‘‘readiness

codes’’ that are part of the on-board

diagnostics for the emissions

systems. In some states, part of the

emissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are not

set, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has been

disconnected or gone dead, these

codes are erased. It takes several

days of driving under various

conditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for a

state emissions test until the

readiness codes are set. See State

Emissions Testing on pages and

322

321

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Readiness Codes

298

01/09/28 20:13:53 31SZ3660_301

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊＊

If you must drive the car a short

distance in this condition, drive

slowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, it

indicates a problem with the car’s

brake system. In most cases, the

problem is a low fluid level in the

brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on

the brake pedal to see if it feels

normal. If it does, check the brake

fluid level the next time you stop at a

service station (see page ). If the

fluid level is low, take the car to your

dealer and have the brake system

inspected for leaks or worn brake

pads.

Slow down by shifting to a lower

gear, and pull to the side of the road

when it is safe. Because of the

longer distance needed to stop, it is

hazardous to drive the car. You

should have it towed, and repaired as

soon as possible. (See

on page .)

However, if the brake pedal does not

feel normal, you should take

immediate action. Because of the

brake system’s dual-circuit design, a

problem in one part of the system

will still give you braking at two

wheels. You will feel the brake pedal

go down much farther before the car

begins to slow down, and you will

have to press harder on the pedal.

The distance needed to stop will be

much longer.

If the ABS indicator and the VSA

system indicator come on with this

indicator, have the car inspected by

your dealer immediately.

The Brake System Indicator

normallycomesonwhenyouturn

the ignition switch ON (II). It is a

reminder to check the parking brake.

It comes on and stays lit if you do not

fully release the parking brake.

240

306

Brake System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Emergency

Towing

299

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

01/09/28 20:14:02 31SZ3660_302

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If the electric motor will not close

the moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroof

motor (see page ). If the fuse

is blown, replace it with one of the

same or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If the

new fuse blows immediately or the

moonroof motor still does not

operate, you can close the

moonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench into

the socket behind this plug. Turn

the wrench until the moonroof is

fully closed.

Remove the wrench. Replace the

plug and lens.

Remove the lens from the rear

ceiling light (see page ).

Get the moonroof wrench out of

the tool kit in the trunk.

Removethepluginthecenterof

the rear ceiling light.

5. 6.

302

269

Closing the Moonroof

Taking Care of the Unexpected

300

SSOOCCKKEETT

PPLLUUGG

01/09/28 20:14:14 31SZ3660_303

Main Menu

Table of Contents

The under-hood fuse box is located

in the engine compartment next to

the battery. To open it, push the tab

as shown.

The interior fuse box is underneath

the dashboard on the driver’s side.

To open it, turn the knob as shown.

All the electrical circuits in your car

have fuses to protect them from a

short circuit or overload. These

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

301

KKNNOOBB

UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD TTAABBIINNTTEERRIIOORR

01/09/28 20:14:22 31SZ3660_304

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Check each of the large fuses in

the under-hood fuse box by

looking through the top at the wire

inside. Removing these fuses

requires a Phillips-head screw-

driver.

Check the smaller fuses in the

under-hood fuse box and all the

fuses in the interior fuse box by

pulling out each fuse with the fuse

puller provided in the door of the

interior fuse box.Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK

(0). Make sure the headlights and

all other accessories are off.

If something electrical in your car

stops working, the first thing you

should check for is a blown fuse.

Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on the

fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses

control that component. Check those

fuses first, but check all the fuses

before deciding that a blown fuse is

not the cause. Replace any blown

fuses and check the component’s

operation.

304 305

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

302

BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEE

PPUULLLLEERR

FFUUSSEE

01/09/28 20:14:33 31SZ3660_305

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Look for a burned wire inside the

fuse. If it is burned, replace it with

oneofthesparefusesofthesame

rating or lower.

If you cannot drive the car without

fixing the problem, and you do not

have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the

same rating or a lower rating from

one of the other circuits. Make sure

youcandowithoutthatcircuit

temporarily (such as the cigarette

lighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it

might blow out again. This does not

indicate anything wrong. Replace the

fuse with one of the correct rating as

soon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of the

same rating blows in a short time,

there is probably a serious

electrical problem in your car.

Leave the blown fuse in that

circuit and have your car checked

by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, the

audio system will disable itself. The

nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou

will see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequency

display. Use the Preset buttons to

enter the five-digit code (see page

156

CONTINUED

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

303

BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a f use with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the

chances of damaging the electrical

system. If you do not have a replace-

ment f use with the proper rating f or the

circuit, install one with a lower rating.

01/09/28 20:14:42 31SZ3660_306

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

20 A

10 A

20 A

15 A

20 A

10 A

20 A

30 A

Not Used

Stop, Horn

Hazard

Driver Power Window

TCS

VSA

Power Door Lock

Right Headlight Low

Left Headlight Low

Cooling Fan

Left Headlight High

Right Headlight High

Condenser Fan

Moonroof

Front Passenger’s Power

Seat

20 A

15 A

7.5 A

20 A

30 A

50 A

40 A

120 A

40 A

50 A

Front Fog Light

ETS (Electrical Tilt/

Telescope Steering)

Meter

Back-up, Radio

Interior Lights

Wiper Motor

Ignition Switch

Power Window

Heater Motor

Battery

VSA Motor

Rear Window Defogger

Fuse box

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

304

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

01/09/28 20:14:52 31SZ3660_307

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊

−

＊ On Canadian models

Small Light

Not Used (OP)

Rear Window Defogger

Relay, Cooling Fan Relay

Radio, ACC

A/C Clutch, Heated Seat

ECU (PCM)

SRS

Driver’s Power Seat

Bose Audio System

Daytime Running Lights

Driver’s Power Seat

Daytime Running Lights

Meter, Moonroof

7.5 A

10 A

7.5 A

20 A

7.5 A

20 A

7.5 A

20 A

30 A

15 A

7.5 A

10 A

20 A

10 A

20 A

10 A

20 A

7.5 A

Starter Signal

ACG

ACC Socket

Power Window MPCS

Front Right Power Window

Mirror

ECU (Body)

Rear Right Power Window

Fuel Pump

SRS

Rear Left Power Window

Ignition Coils

Not Used

No. Circuits Protected No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

305

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

01/09/28 20:15:01 31SZ3660_308

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

There are three popular types of

professional towing equipment.

If your car needs to be towed, call a

professional towing service or, if you

belong to one, an organization that

provides roadside assistance. Never

tow your car behind another vehicle

with just a rope or chain. It is very

dangerous.

The operator

loads your car on the back of a truck.

The tow

truck uses two pivoting arms that go

under the tires (front or rear) and lift

them off the ground. The other two

tires remain on the ground.

The tow

truck uses metal cables with hooks

on the ends. These hooks go around

parts of the frame or suspension and

the cables lift that end of the car off

the ground. Your car’s suspension

and body can be seriously damaged.

If your Acura cannot be transported

by flat-bed, it should be towed by

wheel-lift equipment with the front

wheels off the ground. If, due to

damage, your car must be towed

with the front wheels on the ground,

do the following.

Release the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,

it is best to tow the car no farther

than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the

speedbelow35mph(55km/h).

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lift Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transport

your Acura.

This is

an acceptable way to tow your

Acura.

This method of towing is

unacceptable.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected

306

Improper towing preparation will

damage the transmission. Follow the

above procedure exactly. If you cannot

shif t the transmission or start the

engine, your car must be transported

with the f ront wheels of f the ground.

01/09/28 20:15:12 31SZ3660_309

Main Menu

Table of Contents

If you decide to tow your car with all

four wheels on the ground, make

sure you use a properly-designed and

attached tow bar. Prepare the car for

towing as described above, and leave

the ignition switch in Accessory (I)

so the steering wheel does not lock.

Make sure the radio and any items

plugged into the accessory power

socket are turned off so they do not

rundownthebattery.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected

307

Trying to lift or tow your car by the

bumpers will cause serious damage.

The bumpers are not designed to

support the car’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged if

the steering wheel is locked. Leave the

ignition switch in Accessory (I), and

make sure the steering wheel turns

f reely bef ore you begin towing.

01/09/28 20:15:17 31SZ3660_310

Main Menu

Table of Contents

308

01/09/28 20:15:20 31SZ3660_311

Main Menu

Thediagramsinthissectiongive

you the dimensions and capacities of

your Acura, and the locations of the

identification numbers. It also

includes information you should

know about your vehicle’s tires and

emissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 310

................................Specifications . 312

DOT Tire Quality Grading

.............................(U.S.Cars) .314

.................................Treadwear . 314

......................................Traction . 314

.............................Temperature . 315

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 316

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 317

.......................Emissions Controls . 318

.....................The Clean Air Act . 318

Crankcase Emissions Control

....................................System . 318

Evaporative Emissions Control

....................................System . 318

Onboard Refueling Vapor

................................Recovery . 318

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 319

....................PGM-FI System . 319

Ignition Timing Control

................................System . 319

Exhaust Gas Recirculation

...................(EGR) System . 319

Three Way Catalytic

...........................Converter . 319

....................Replacement Parts . 319

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 320

..............State Emissions Testing . 321

Technical Information

309

01/09/28 20:15:25 31SZ3660_312

Main Menu

＊

Your car has several identifying

numbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your

Acura dealer uses to register your

car for warranty purposes. It is also

necessary for licensing and insuring

your car. The easiest place to find

the VIN is on a plate fastened to the

top of the dashboard. You can see it

by looking through the windshield

on the driver’s side. It is also on the

Certification label attached to the

driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on

the engine compartment bulkhead.

The VIN is also provided in bar code

on the Certification label.

Identification Numbers

Technical Information

310

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

The U.S. car

model

01/09/28 20:15:31 31SZ3660_313

Main Menu

The Engine Number is stamped into

the engine block. It is on the front

left, below the valve cover.

The Transmission Number is on a

label on top of the transmission.

Identification Numbers

Technical Information

311

TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

01/09/28 20:15:36 31SZ3660_314

Main Menu

−−

＊

Technical Information

Specifications

312

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the

engine.

Reserve tank capacity:

4.5 US qt (4.3

, 3.8 Imp qt)

196.7 in (4,995 mm)

71.7 in (1,820 mm)

54.5 in (1,385 mm)

114.6 in (2,910 mm)

61.0 in (1,550 mm)

60.6 in (1,540 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)

24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

ND-OIL8

18.0 US gal (68

, 15.0 Imp gal)

1.61 US gal (6.1

, 1.34 Imp gal)

2.27 US gal (8.6

, 1.89 Imp gal)

4.9 US qt (4.6 , 4.0 Imp qt)

5.6 US qt (5.3 , 4.7 Imp qt)

3.2 US qt (3.0

, 2.6 Imp qt)

9.1 US qt (8.6

, 7.6 Imp qt)

1.11 US qt (1.05 ,0.92Impqt)

1.16 US qt (1.10

,0.97Impqt)

2.6 US qt (2.5

, 2.2 Imp qt)

6.9 US qt (6.5

, 5.7 Imp qt)

0.172 US gal (0.65

, 0.143 Imp gal)

Length

Width

Height

Wheelbase

Track

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached

to the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant type

Charge quantity

Lubricant type

Fuel tank

Engine

coolant

Engine oil

Automatic

transmission

fluid

Differential

oil

Windshield

washer

reservoir

Approx.

Front

Rear

Change

Total

Change

Including filter

Without filter

Total

Change

Total

Change

Total

U.S. Cars

Canada Cars

01/09/28 20:15:54 31SZ3660_315

Main Menu

−

＊

−

＊

Technical Information

Specifications

313

Lights Engine

Alignment

Tires

Battery

Fuses

12 V

55 W (H1) (High beam)

27/8 W

3.54x3.58in(90x91mm)

212 cu-in (3,474 cm

)

9.6 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°

0° 30’

2° 50’

P225/55R16 94V

T135/80D16 101M

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm

)

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm

)

12 V

21 W

21/5 W

55 W (H1)

21 W

3CP

21 W

3CP

3.4 W

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking lights

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/Taillights

Front fog lights

High-mount brake light

Front side marker lights

Back-up lights

License plate lights

Ceiling lights

Trunk light

Door courtesy lights

Vanity mirror light

Type

BorexStroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke

SOHC V-6 gasoline engine

Toe

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

See spark plug maintenance

section page 246 .

Capacity 12 V 55 AH/5 HR

Interior

Under-hood See page 304 or the fuse box

cover.

See page 305 or the fuse label

attached to the inside of the fuse

box door under the dashboard.

65 AH/20 HR12 V

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/Rear

Spare

Front

Rear

Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge

tube (D2R).

01/09/28 20:16:19 31SZ3660_316

Main Menu

−

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government

test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-

half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual condi-

tions of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.

Federal Safety Requirements. All

tires are also graded for treadwear,

traction, and temperature perform-

ance according to Department of

Transportation (DOT) standards.

The following explains these

gradings.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between the tread shoulder and the

maximum section width. For

example:

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces

of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction

performance.

Warning: The traction grade

assignedtothistireisbasedon

straight-ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades.

Treadwear

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Technical Information

314

01/09/28 20:16:30 31SZ3660_317

Main Menu

− Warning: The temperature grade for

this tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the

minimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Technical Information

Temperature A,B,C

315

01/09/28 20:16:36 31SZ3660_318

Main Menu

Some conventional gasolines are

being blended with alcohol or an

ether compound. These gasolines

are collectively referred to as

oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air

standards, some areas of the United

States and Canada use oxygenated

fuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, be

sure it is unleaded and meets the

minimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, try

to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some

states/provinces require this

informationtobepostedonthe

pump.

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether)

You may use gasoline containing up

to 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)

You may use gasoline containing up

to 10 percent ethanol by volume.

Gasoline containing ethanol may be

marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA and

Canadian CGSB approved

percentages of oxygenates:

If you notice any undesirable

operating symptoms, try another

service station or switch to another

brand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performance

problems resulting from the use of

an oxygenated fuel containing more

than the percentages of oxygenates

given above are not covered under

warranty.

(methyl or wood

alcohol)

Your vehicle was not designed to use

fuel that contains methanol.

Methanol can corrode metal parts in

the fuel system, and also damage

plastic and rubber components. This

damage would not be covered by

your warranties.

MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels

Technical Information

316

01/09/28 20:16:45 31SZ3660_319

Main Menu

If you are planning to take your

Acura outside the U.S. or Canada,

contact the tourist bureaus in the

areas you will be traveling in to find

out about the availability of unleaded

gasoline with the proper octane

rating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,

be aware that using leaded gasoline

in your Acura will affect perfor-

mance and fuel mileage, and damage

its emissions controls. It will no

longer comply with U.S. and

Canadian emissions regulations, and

will be illegal to operate in North

America. To bring your car back into

compliance will require the replace-

ment of several components, such as

theoxygensensorsandthethree

way catalytic converter. These re-

placements are not covered under

warranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries

Technical Information

317

01/09/28 20:16:50 31SZ3660_320

Main Menu

＊

The United States Clean Air Act

sets standards for automobile

emissions. It also requires that

automobile manufacturers explain to

owners how their emissions controls

workandwhattodotomaintain

them. This section summarizes how

the emissions controls work.

Scheduled maintenance is on page

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply

with the Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (CMVSS) for

Emissions valid at the time they are

manufactured.

The burning of gasoline in your car’s

engine produces several byproducts.

Some of these are carbon monoxide

(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and

hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline

evaporating from the tank also

produces hydrocarbons. Controlling

the production of NOx, CO, and HC

is important to the environment.

Under certain conditions of sunlight

and climate, NOx and HC react to

form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon

monoxide does not contribute to

smog creation, but it is a poisonous

gas.

Your car has a Positive Crankcase

Ventilation System. This keeps

gasses that build up in the engine’s

crankcase from going into the

atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase

Ventilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intake

manifold. They are then drawn into

the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel

tank, an evaporative emissions

control canister filled with charcoal

adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this

canister while the engine is off. After

the engine is started and warmed up,

the vapor is drawn into the engine

and burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery (ORVR) system captures

the fuel vapors during refueling. The

vapors are adsorbed in a canister

filled with activated carbon. While

driving, the fuel vapors are drawn

into the engine and burned off.

218

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions Control

System

Evaporative Emissions Control

System

Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery

Emissions Controls

Technical Information

318

01/09/28 20:17:00 31SZ3660_321

Main Menu

The exhaust emissions controls

include four systems: PGM-FI,

Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust

Gas Recirculation and Three Way

Catalytic Converter. These four

systems work together to control the

engine’s combustion and minimize

the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that

comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust

emissions control systems are

separate from the crankcase and

evaporative emissions control

systems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequential

multiport fuel injection.

It has three subsystems: Air Intake,

Engine Control, and Fuel Control.

The Powertrain Control Module

(PCM) uses various sensors to

determine how much air is going

into the engine. It then controls how

much fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts the

ignition timing, reducing the amount

of HC, CO and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation

(EGR) system takes some of the

exhaust gas and routes it back into

the intake manifold. Adding exhaust

gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces

the amount of NOx produced when

the fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter is

in the exhaust system. Through

chemical reactions, it converts HC,

CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust

to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen

(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems are

designed and certified to work to-

gether in reducing emissions to

levels that comply with the Clean Air

Act. To make sure the emissions

remain low, you should use only new

Genuine Acura replacement parts or

their equivalent for repairs. Using

lower quality parts may increase the

emissions from your car.

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)

System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

Technical Information

319

01/09/28 20:17:12 31SZ3660_322

Main Menu

Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded

gasoline can contaminate the

catalyst metals, making the three

way catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve

as catalysts, promoting chemical

reactions to convert the exhaust

gasses without affecting the metals.

The catalytic converter is referred to

as a three-way catalyst, since it acts

on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement

unit must be an original Acura part

or its equivalent.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

The three way catalytic converter

must operate at a high temperature

for the chemical reactions to take

place. It can set on fire any com-

bustible materials that come near it.

Park your car away from high grass,

dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalytic

converter contributes to air pollution,

and can impair your engine’s per-

formance. Follow these guidelines to

protect your car’s three way catalytic

converter.

Have your car diagnosed and

repaired if it is misfiring, back-

firing, stalling, or otherwise not

running properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Technical Information

320

TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

01/09/28 20:17:20 31SZ3660_323

Main Menu

If you take your vehicle for a state

emissions test shortly after the

battery has been disconnected or

gone dead, it may not pass the test.

This is because of certain ‘‘readiness

codes’’ that must be set in the on-

board diagnostics for the emissions

systems. These codes are erased

when the battery is disconnected,

and set again only after several days

of driving under a variety of

conditions.

If the testing facility determines that

the readiness codes are not set, you

will be requested to return at a later

date to complete the test. If you must

get the vehicle re-tested within the

next two or three days, you can

condition the vehicle for re-testing

by doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,

but not completely, full (around

3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has been

parked with the engine off for 8

hours or more.

Make sure the ambient

temperature is between 20° and

95°F.

Without touching the accelerator

pedal, start the engine and let it

idle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park

(automatic transmission). Increase

the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and

hold it there until the temperature

gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the

scale (approximately 3 minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

Technical Information

321

01/09/28 20:17:30 31SZ3660_324

Main Menu

Then drive in city/suburban

traffic for at least 10 minutes.

When traffic conditions allow, let

the vehicle coast for several

seconds without using the

accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal.

If the testing facility determines the

readiness codes are still not set, see

your Acura dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveled

major highway where you can

maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph

(80to97km/h)foratleast20

minutes. Drive on the highway in

D (A/T). Do not use the cruise

control. When traffic allows, drive

for 90 seconds without moving the

accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed

may vary slightly; this is okay.) If

you cannot do this for a

continuous 90 seconds because of

traffic conditions, drive for at least

30 seconds, then repeat it two

more times (for a total of 90

seconds).

Technical Information

State Emissions Testing

322

01/09/28 20:17:35 31SZ3660_325

Main Menu

Customer Relations

................................Information . 324

.............Canada Zone Office Map . 325

....................Warranty Coverages . 326

Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 327

.....................Authorized Manuals . 329

Warranty and Customer Relations

323

01/09/28 20:17:39 31SZ3660_326

Main Menu

If you are dissatisfied with the

decision made by the dealership’s

management, contact the Acura

Customer Relations Office.

When you call or write, please give

us this information:

Acura dealership personnel are

trained professionals. They should

be able to answer all your questions.

If you encounter a problem that your

dealership does not solve to your

satisfaction, please discuss it with

the dealership’s management. The

Service Manager or General

Manager can help. Almost all

problems are solved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands:

Vortex Motor Corp.

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

(787) 250-4327

Refer to the Canadian Zone Office

Map on the next page.

Canadian Owners:

Acura Automobile Division

Client Services Office

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Vehicle Identification Number

(see page )

Name and address of the dealer

who services your car

Date of purchase

Mileage on your car

Your name, address, and tele-

phone number

A detailed description of the

problem

Name of the dealer who sold the

car to you

310

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations

324

01/09/28 20:17:48 31SZ3660_327

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Canada Zone Office Map

Warranty and Customer Relations

325

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.

National Office

Honda Canada Inc.

715 Milner Avenue

Toronto, ON

M1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

01/09/28 20:17:53 31SZ3660_328

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

a seat

belt that fails to function properly is

covered for the useful life of the

vehicle.

provides

coverageforaslongasthepur-

chaser of the muffler owns the

vehicle.

Your new Acura is covered by these

warranties:

covers your new vehicle, except for

the battery, emissions control

systems and accessories, against

defects in materials and

workmanship.

provides prorated

coverage for a replacement battery

purchased from an Acura dealer.

this warranty gives up

to 100 percent credit toward a

replacement battery.

these two

warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-

sions control systems. Time, mileage,

and coverage are conditional. Please

read the warranty manual for exact

information.

covers all genuine

Acura replacement parts against

defects in materials and workman-

ship.

genuine Acura Accessories are

covered under this warranty. Time

and mileage limits depend on the

type of accessory and other factors.

Please read your warranty manual

for details.

all exterior body panels are

covered for rust-through from the

inside for the specified time period

with no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to

all these warranties. Please read the

2002 Acura Warranty Information

booklet that came with your car for

precise information on warranty

coverages. Your Acura’s original

tires are covered by their

manufacturer. Tire warranty

information is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2002 Warranty

Manual that came with your car.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler Lifetime

Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery Limited

Warranty

Original Equipment Battery Limited

Warranty

Emissions Control Systems Defects

Warranty and Emissions

Performance Warranty

Replacement Parts Limited

Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations

326

01/09/28 20:18:05 31SZ3660_329

Main Menu

Table of Contents

To contact NHTSA, you may either

call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in

Washington D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of

Transportation, Washington,

D.C. 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor

vehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying Acura Automobile

Division, American Honda Motor Co.,

Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Acura

Automobile Division, American

Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

327

01/09/28 20:18:11 31SZ3660_330

Main Menu

Table of Contents

328

01/09/28 20:18:14 31SZ3660_331

Main Menu

Table of Contents

＊

−

＊

２

０

２

Ａ

Ｃ

Ｕ

The following publications covering the operation and

servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm

Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,

for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number

on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,

contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,

Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should

contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals

(U.S. only)

329

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$75.00

$36.00

$45.00

$42.00

$40.00

$27.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61SZ305

61SZ306

61SZ306EL

61SZ330

31SZ3660

31SZ3760

ACU-R

Form Description

1996-2001 Acura 3.5 RL

Service Manual

2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Service Manual Supplement

1996-2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

1996-2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Body Repair Manual

2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Owner’s Manual

2002 Acura 3.5 RL

Navigation Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

PUBLICATION NUMBER

VEHICLE MODEL

Name Year

Qty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change without

notice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please

allow adequate time for delivery.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can

pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to

Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring

obligation.

01/09/28 20:18:26 31SZ3660_332

Main Menu

Table of Contents

−

Ｓ

Ｈ

Ｉ

Ｐ

Ｔ

Ｏ

Ｐ

Ａ

Ｙ

Ｍ

Ｅ

Ｎ

Ｔ

This manual complements the Service Manual by

providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each

electrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in the

replacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommended

procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.

It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple

enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-

stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

330

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,

and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should

be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown

below for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name

Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip Code

City

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.

Do not send cash

Master

Card

VISA Check here if your billing address is different

from the shipping address shown above.

Account Number

Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

()

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14

days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

01/09/28 20:18:37 31SZ3660_333

Main Menu

Table of Contents

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 184

................................Accessories . 184

.Additional Safety Precautions . 185

............................Modifications . 185

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 78

.............Accessory Power Socket . 108

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 228

.........................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 43, 45

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 241

.................Air Conditioning Filter . 252

..............Air Conditioning System . 114

..............................Maintenance . 251

.................................Usage . 116, 121

.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 114

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 253

...........................Alarm, Anti-theft . 156

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 316

.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 275

......................................Antifreeze . 231

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 56, 199

...................................Operation . 199

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 156

Anti-theft Steering Column

..............................................Lock . 77

..........................Anti-theft System . 157

..........................Appearance Care . 273

............................................Armrest . 89

.........................................Ashtrays . 110

...............Audio Controls, Remote . 155

................................Audio System . 128

Automatic Climate Control

........................................System . 114

.........................Automatic Lighting . 64

Automatic Seat Belt

...................................Tensioners . 41

.............Automatic Speed Control . 158

..............Automatic Transmission . 192

..........................Capacity,Fluid .312

...............Checking Fluid Level . 238

.......................................Shifting . 192

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 192

................Shift Lever Positions . 192

....................Shift Lock Release . 195

Battery

Charging System

...........................Indicator . 54, 296

............................Jump Starting . 290

..............................Maintenance . 246

............................Specifications . 313

..............................Before Driving . 177

....................................Belts,Seat .8,40

...........................Beverage Holder . 104

...................................Body Repair . 280

Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 198

.............Break-in, New Linings . 178

....................Bulb Replacement . 266

...........................................Fluid . 239

.......................................Parking . 102

.................System Indicator . 54, 299

........................Wear Indicators . 197

.............................Braking System . 197

........................Break-in, New Car . 198

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 66

........................Brights, Headlights . 63

Index

A B

01/09/28 20:18:43 31SZ3660_334

Main Menu

＊

Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 266

..............................Brake Lights . 266

............................Ceiling Lights . 269

........................Courtesy Lights . 269

.................................Fog Lights . 263

........Front Side Marker Lights . 265

.................................Headlights . 262

.........High-mount Brake Light . 267

.................License Plate Lights . 268

............................Specifications . 313

...............................Trunk Light . 270

....................Turn Signal Lights . 265

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 262

..................................Cancel Button . 75

............................Capacities Chart . 312

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49

............................Carrying, Cargo . 186

Cassette Player

............................................Care . 148

...........................Operation . 133, 145

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..................CD Changer . 136, 149, 151

................................Ceiling Lights . 111

........................Certification Label . 310

............................................Chains . 259

Changing Oil

........................................How to . 229

......................................When to . 218

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 283

............Changing Engine Coolant . 233

...Charging System Indicator . 54, 297

............Checklist, Before Driving . 190

.....................................Child Safety . 20

.......................................Child Seats . 24

............Tether Anchorage Point . 39

..................Childproof Door Locks . 82

..........................Cigarette Lighter . 109

...................................Cleaner, Air . 241

Cleaning

....................Aluminum Wheels . 275

...................................Carpeting . 276

......................................Exterior . 274

.........................................Fabric . 276

.......................................Interior . 276

.......................................Leather . 276

...................................Seat Belts . 276

...........................................Vinyl . 276

....................................Windows . 277

................................Wood Trim . 277

...............Climate Control System . 114

.........................Clock, Setting the . 102

.....................Code, Audio System . 136

........................CO in the Exhaust . 318

........................................Coin Box . 106

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 191

..............................Compact Spare . 282

.................Console Compartment . 106

...............Consumer Information . 324

.............Controls, Instruments and . 51

Coolant

........................................Adding . 231

....................................Checking . 182

.........................Proper Solution . 231

...................................Replacing . 233

...................Temperature Gauge . 60

....................Corrosion Protection . 279

............................Courtesy Lights . 117

Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 318

............Cruise Control Operation . 158

..........Customer Relations Office . 324

Index

01/09/28 20:18:49 31SZ3660_335

Main Menu

CONTINUED

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii

...................................Dashboard . 2, 52

................Daytime Running Lights . 65

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 327

................Defogger, Rear Window . 71

......Defrosting the Windows . 120, 124

..............................Differential Oil . 239

....................................Dimensions . 312

...............Dimming the Headlights . 63

Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 238

..................................Engine Oil . 181

..........................Directional Signals . 66

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 197

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 230

Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 78

....................Lockout Prevention . 79

..............................Monitor Light . 57

......................Power Door Locks . 78

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 314

.....................................Drive Belts . 252

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 189

....................................Economy . 183

.........................In Bad Weather . 204

................In Foreign Countries . 317

Driving Position Memory

..........................................System . 97

..............................Economy, Fuel . 183

............Emergencies on the Road . 281

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 290

...........Brake System Indicator . 299

................Changing a Flat Tire . 283

.....Charging System Indicator . 296

..................Checking the Fuses . 302

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 295

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 297

...Manually Closing Moonroof . 300

..................Overheated Engine . 293

.........................Emergency Brake . 102

......................Emergency Flashers . 70

......................Emergency Towing . 306

.......................Emissions Controls . 318

..............Emissions Testing,State . 321

Engine

............................................Belts . 252

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 60

Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 55, 297

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 54, 295

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 227

...............................Overheating . 293

............................Specifications . 313

............................Speed Limiter . 194

.......................................Starting . 191

...................Engine Speed Limiter . 194

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 316

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 318

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 49

Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 319

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

..................Exterior,Cleaningthe .274

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 276

Index

III

01/09/28 20:18:55 31SZ3660_336

Main Menu

..........................Fan, Interior . 118, 123

Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 113

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179

Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 241

.......................Air Conditioning . 252

...............................................Oil . 229

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 70

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 283

Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 238

..........................................Brake . 239

................................Differential . 239

..........................Power Steering . 240

..................Windshield Washer . 237

FM Stereo Radio

...........................Reception . 129, 139

........................................Fog Lights . 67

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 317

..........................Four-way Flashers . 70

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 43

.................................................Fuel . 178

......................Fill Door and Cap . 179

...........................................Gauge . 60

................Octane Requirement . 178

...............................Oxygenated . 316

........................Reserve Indicator . 57

........................Tank, Filling the . 179

..............Fuel Mileage, Improving . 183

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 302

..........................................Gasohol . 316

.........................................Gasoline . 178

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 57

...........................................Gauge . 60

................Octane Requirement . 178

........................Tank, Filling the . 179

................Gas Station Procedures . 179

.............................................Gauges . 58

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 60

...............................................Fuel . 60

...............................Speedometer . 58

.................................Tachometer . 58

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 207

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 192

..............................Glass Cleaning . 278

........................................Glove Box . 88

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 207

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 262

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 70

Headlights

....................Automatic Lighting . 64

............Daytime Running Lights . 65

..................High Beam Indicator . 57

....................Lights On Indicator . 55

.........................Reminder Chime . 63

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 262

...................................Turning on . 63

..............................Head Restraints . 88

.....................Heating and Cooling . 114

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 191

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 63

..............High-mount Brake Light . 267

HomeLink Universal

...............................Transmitter . 162

....................................Hood Latch . 241

.......................Hood, Opening the . 180

..................................................Horn . 62

.................................Hydroplaning . 205

Index

01/09/28 20:19:00 31SZ3660_337

Main Menu

CONTINUED

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 310

Ignition

..............................................Keys . 74

...........................................Switch . 77

............Timing Control System . 319

........................Immobilizer System . 75

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

Indicators, Instrument

.............................................Panel . 53

...............................Infant Restraint . 28

......................................Infant Seats . 28

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 253

...................................Inside Mirror . 91

.............................Inspection, Tire . 255

............................Instrument Panel . 53

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 66

...........................Interior Cleaning . 277

........................................Introduction . i

........................Jacking up the Car . 284

.......................................Jack, Tire . 284

................................Jump Starting . 290

..................................................Keys . 74

.......................Label, Certification . 310

.................Lane Change, Signaling . 66

..........................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40

...................................Learning Key . 75

.........................Leather, Cleaning . 276

........................Lights On Indicator . 55

.........................Lighter, Cigarette . 109

Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 262

........................................Ceiling . 111

.....................................Courtesy . 112

.......................................Indicator . 53

.........................................Parking . 63

..................................Turn Signal . 66

.....................................Load Limit . 187

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 77

Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 77

..........................Childproof Door . 82

............................Fuel Fill Door . 179

....................................Glove Box . 85

.................................Power Door . 78

...........................................Trunk . 83

........Trunk Pass-through Cover . 90

........................Low Coolant Level . 182

.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 57

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 54, 295

Lubricant Specifications

..........................................Chart . 312

.........................................Luggage . 186

..................................Maintenance . 213

...Owner Maintenance Checks . 225

.................................Record . 223-224

......................Required Indicator . 61

..........................................Safety . 214

.............................Schedule . 218-222

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 55, 297

.............Memory, Driving Position . 93

...............................Meters, Gauges . 58

Index

01/09/28 20:19:09 31SZ3660_338

Main Menu

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 316

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 91

.......................................Moonroof . 100

......................Closing Manually . 300

...................................Operation . 100

...................Neutral Gear Position . 193

..................New Vehicle Break-in . 178

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 310

...................Radiator Overheating . 293

...Radio/Cassette Sound System . 128

...........................Readiness Codes . 298

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 264

..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 90

............................Rear Ventilation . 126

............................Rear View Mirror . 91

.................Rear Window Defogger . 71

...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 87

.............................Reminder Lights . 53

.......................Remote Transmitter . 79

Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 241

.............Air Conditioning Filter . 252

..............................Paint Touch-up . 275

..............Panel Brightness Control . 66

........................Park Gear Position . 193

...........................................Parking . 196

...............................Parking Brake . 106

Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 54, 299

.................................Parking Lights . 63

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 320

.............................PGM-FI System . 319

..................Polishing and Waxing . 275

............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

............................Protecting Adults . 12

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

........................Protecting Children . 20

.......................Protecting Infants . 28

.......Protecting Larger Children . 35

.........Protecting Small Children . 32

Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 39

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 178

.........................................Odometer . 59

...............................Odometer, Trip . 59

Oil

........................Change, How to . 229

......................Change, When to . 218

......................Checking Engine . 181

..............Pressure Indicator . 54, 295

Selecting Proper Viscosity

......................................Chart . 228

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80

Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 310

............................................OnStar . 167

.........................Opening the Trunk . 83

..Operation in Foreign Countries . 317

..............................Outside Mirrors . 91

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 59

....................Overheating, Engine . 293

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 225

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 316

Index

01/09/28 20:19:16 31SZ3660_339

Main Menu

＊

CONTINUED

..........................Engine Coolant . 233

................Engine Oil and Filter . 229

..........................................Fuses . 302

................................Light Bulbs . 262

....................................Schedule . 216

................................Spark Plugs . 243

...........................................Tires . 257

.............................Wiper Blades . 249

Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 42

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 182

..................Reverse Gear Position . 193

................................Rotation, Tire . 256

........................................Safety Belts . 8

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 327

.................................Safety Features . 7

...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 10

..........................Head Restraints . 10

.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 50

...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 40

...............Additional Information . 40

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18

.Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner . 41

.............Child Seat Anchor Plate . 39

.....................................Cleaning . 277

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40

................................Maintenance . 42

Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 40, 54

................................Replacement . 42

...................System Components . 40

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15

....................................Seat Heaters . 95

....................Seat Position Memory . 93

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 86

................Security Alarm System . 157

...............................Serial Number . 310

...........................Service Intervals . 218

...........................Service Manual . 329

.........Service Station Procedures . 179

..........................Setting the Clock . 102

Shifting the Automatic

.............................Transmission . 192

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 192

........................Shift Lock Release . 195

....................................Side Airbags . 45

How The Side Airbag Indicator

............................Light Works . 47

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 45

Side Marker Lights, Bulb

.........................Replacement in . 265

...............................Signaling Turns . 66

.........................................Ski Sleeve . 96

.....................................Snow Tires . 259

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 274

................................Sound System . 128

Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 282

............................Specifications . 313

................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 243

....................Specifications Charts . 312

................................Speed Control . 158

...................................Speedometer . 58

.......................................Spotlights . 111

Index

VII

01/09/28 20:19:23 31SZ3660_340

Main Menu

..........SRS, Additional Information . 43

...Additional Safety Precautions . 48

Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 41

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 46

.....How Your Airbags Work . 43, 45

........................SRS Components . 43

..................................SRS Service . 48

.............................SRS Indicator . 46, 55

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 77

.......................Starting the Engine . 191

In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 191

................With a Dead Battery . 290

..........State Emissions Testing . 322

........Steam Coming from Engine . 293

Steering Wheel

................................Adjustments . 71

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 77

........................Position Memory . 93

...................Stereo Sound System . 128

...........................Storing Your Car . 272

........................................Sun Visor . 107

........................Sunglasses Holder . 107

Supplemental Restraint

............................System . 9, 43, 45

....................Service Precautions . 48

......................................Servicing . 48

.........................SRS Indicator . 46, 55

...................System Components . 43

...............Tensioners, Seat Belts . 41

..................................Synthetic Oil . 228

.....................................Tachometer . 58

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 266

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 281

...........................Tape Player . 133, 148

Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 314

.....Emissions Control Systems . 318

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 316

Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 320

.......................Temperature Gauge . 60

...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 41

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 39

...............Theft Deterrent System . 157

............................Theft Protection . 156

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 320

..........................Time, Setting the . 102

....................................Timing Belt . 253

....................................Tire Chains . 259

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 283

...............................................Tires . 253

..............................Air Pressure . 254

...................................Balancing . 256

.........................Checking Wear . 255

..........................Compact Spare . 282

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 314

......................................Inflation . 253

..................................Inspection . 255

..............................Maintenance . 256

...................................Replacing . 257

......................................Rotating . 256

...........................................Snow . 259

............................Specifications . 313

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 283

...............................Torn Seat Belts . 42

Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 206

..........By Emergency Wrecker . 306

Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 238

Index

VIII

01/09/28 20:19:28 31SZ3660_341

Main Menu

＊

...........................Fluid Selection . 238

..............Identification Number . 311

.............Shifting the Automatic . 192

.....................................Treadwear . 314

.......................................Trip Meter . 59

................................................Trunk . 83

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 84

.................................Opening the . 83

...................Open Monitor Light . 57

....................................Turn Signals . 66

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 279

Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 281

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 314

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 178

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 277

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 230

................................Vanity Mirror . 107

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 187

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 312

....Vehicle Identification Number . 310

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 201

........VSA System Indicator . 56, 202

...VSA Activation Indicator . 56, 201

.........................VSA Off Switch . 202

.............................Vehicle Storage . 271

.....................................Ventilation . 116

.................................................VIN . 310

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 277

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 228

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii

.........Warning Labels, Location of . 50

..................Warranty Coverages . 326

Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 237

.....................................Operation . 70

.........................................Washing . 274

..................Waxing and Polishing . 275

Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 71

............Alignment and Balance . 256

......Cleaning Aluminum Alloys . 275

..........................Compact Spare . 282

......................................Wrench . 284

Windows

.....................................Cleaning . 277

..................Operating the Power . 98

...........................Rear, Defogger . 71

Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 68

...........................Defroster . 120, 125

.......................................Washers . 70

Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 249

.....................................Operation . 68

....................................Wood Trim . 277

....................................Worn Tires . 255

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 306

U.S. and Canada only

Index

01/09/28 20:19:34 31SZ3660_342

Main Menu

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

SpareTirePressure:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline,

pump octane number of 91 or

higher.

18.0 US gal (68

, 15.0 Imp gal)

API Service SJ ‘‘Energy

Conserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-30

viscosity (see page ).

Oil change capacity (including

filter):

Front/Rear:

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm

)

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm

)

Honda Power Steering Fluid

preferred, or another brand of

power steering fluid as a

temporary replacement. Do not

use ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or

DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary

replacement (see page ).

4.9 US qt (4.6

, 4.0 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic

Transmission Fluid) preferred, or

aDEXRON

III ATF as a

temporary replacement (see page

227

238

240

01/09/28 20:19:51 31SZ3660_345

Main Menu

Download
Save PDF to desktop

Email
Email completed PDF

Send for Signing
Email for others to sign

Print
Print document

NAME

2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents (Honda)

View Audit Log
Print With Audit Log
Duplicate Document

Fill Online, Printable, Fillable, Blank 2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents (Honda) Form

Related forms

Fillable 2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents (Honda)

Fill Online, Printable, Fillable, Blank 2002 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents (Honda) Form

Related forms

First 20 documents completely FREE!